xref: /vim-8.2.3635/src/misc1.c (revision c0197e28)
1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
2  *
3  * VIM - Vi IMproved	by Bram Moolenaar
4  *
5  * Do ":help uganda"  in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
6  * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
7  * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
8  */
9 
10 /*
11  * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere
12  */
13 
14 #include "vim.h"
15 #include "version.h"
16 
17 #ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H
18 # include <fcntl.h>		/* for chdir() */
19 #endif
20 
21 static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir));
22 static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name));
23 #if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
24 static char_u *remove_tail_with_ext __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *ext));
25 #endif
26 static int get_indent_str __ARGS((char_u *ptr, int ts));
27 static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u	*src));
28 
29 /*
30  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line.
31  */
32     int
33 get_indent()
34 {
35     return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
36 }
37 
38 /*
39  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum".
40  */
41     int
42 get_indent_lnum(lnum)
43     linenr_T	lnum;
44 {
45     return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
46 }
47 
48 #if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO)
49 /*
50  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer
51  * "buf".
52  */
53     int
54 get_indent_buf(buf, lnum)
55     buf_T	*buf;
56     linenr_T	lnum;
57 {
58     return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts);
59 }
60 #endif
61 
62 /*
63  * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with
64  * 'tabstop' at "ts"
65  */
66     static int
67 get_indent_str(ptr, ts)
68     char_u	*ptr;
69     int		ts;
70 {
71     int		count = 0;
72 
73     for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr)
74     {
75 	if (*ptr == TAB)    /* count a tab for what it is worth */
76 	    count += ts - (count % ts);
77 	else if (*ptr == ' ')
78 	    ++count;		/* count a space for one */
79 	else
80 	    break;
81     }
82     return (count);
83 }
84 
85 /*
86  * Set the indent of the current line.
87  * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
88  * Caller must take care of undo.
89  * "flags":
90  *	SIN_CHANGED:	call changed_bytes() if the line was changed.
91  *	SIN_INSERT:	insert the indent in front of the line.
92  *	SIN_UNDO:	save line for undo before changing it.
93  * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
94  */
95     int
96 set_indent(size, flags)
97     int		size;
98     int		flags;
99 {
100     char_u	*p;
101     char_u	*newline;
102     char_u	*oldline;
103     char_u	*s;
104     int		todo;
105     int		ind_len;
106     int		line_len;
107     int		doit = FALSE;
108     int		ind_done;
109     int		tab_pad;
110 
111     /*
112      * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of
113      * characters needed for the indent.
114      */
115     todo = size;
116     ind_len = 0;
117     p = oldline = ml_get_curline();
118 
119     /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it
120      * isn't already set */
121 
122     /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
123     if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
124     {
125 	/* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
126 	 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
127 	if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
128 	{
129 	    ind_done = 0;
130 
131 	    /* count as many characters as we can use */
132 	    while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
133 	    {
134 		if (*p == TAB)
135 		{
136 		    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
137 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
138 		    /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
139 		    if (todo < tab_pad)
140 			break;
141 		    todo -= tab_pad;
142 		    ++ind_len;
143 		    ind_done += tab_pad;
144 		}
145 		else
146 		{
147 		    --todo;
148 		    ++ind_len;
149 		    ++ind_done;
150 		}
151 		++p;
152 	    }
153 
154 	    /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
155 	    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
156 	    if (todo >= tab_pad)
157 	    {
158 		doit = TRUE;
159 		todo -= tab_pad;
160 		++ind_len;
161 		/* ind_done += tab_pad; */
162 	    }
163 	}
164 
165 	/* count tabs required for indent */
166 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
167 	{
168 	    if (*p != TAB)
169 		doit = TRUE;
170 	    else
171 		++p;
172 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
173 	    ++ind_len;
174 	    /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */
175 	}
176     }
177     /* count spaces required for indent */
178     while (todo > 0)
179     {
180 	if (*p != ' ')
181 	    doit = TRUE;
182 	else
183 	    ++p;
184 	--todo;
185 	++ind_len;
186 	/* ++ind_done; */
187     }
188 
189     /* Return if the indent is OK already. */
190     if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT))
191 	return FALSE;
192 
193     /* Allocate memory for the new line. */
194     if (flags & SIN_INSERT)
195 	p = oldline;
196     else
197 	p = skipwhite(p);
198     line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1;
199     newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
200     if (newline == NULL)
201 	return FALSE;
202 
203     /* Put the characters in the new line. */
204     s = newline;
205     todo = size;
206     /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
207     if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
208     {
209 	/* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
210 	 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
211 	if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
212 	{
213 	    p = oldline;
214 	    ind_done = 0;
215 
216 	    while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
217 	    {
218 		if (*p == TAB)
219 		{
220 		    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
221 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
222 		    /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
223 		    if (todo < tab_pad)
224 			break;
225 		    todo -= tab_pad;
226 		    ind_done += tab_pad;
227 		}
228 		else
229 		{
230 		    --todo;
231 		    ++ind_done;
232 		}
233 		*s++ = *p++;
234 	    }
235 
236 	    /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
237 	    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
238 	    if (todo >= tab_pad)
239 	    {
240 		*s++ = TAB;
241 		todo -= tab_pad;
242 	    }
243 
244 	    p = skipwhite(p);
245 	}
246 
247 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
248 	{
249 	    *s++ = TAB;
250 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
251 	}
252     }
253     while (todo > 0)
254     {
255 	*s++ = ' ';
256 	--todo;
257     }
258     mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len);
259 
260     /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */
261     if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK)
262     {
263 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE);
264 	if (flags & SIN_CHANGED)
265 	    changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
266 	/* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */
267 	if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum
268 				&& saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline))
269 	    saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (p - oldline);
270     }
271     else
272 	vim_free(newline);
273 
274     curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
275     return TRUE;
276 }
277 
278 /*
279  * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size)
280  * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
281  * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
282  */
283     static int
284 copy_indent(size, src)
285     int		size;
286     char_u	*src;
287 {
288     char_u	*p = NULL;
289     char_u	*line = NULL;
290     char_u	*s;
291     int		todo;
292     int		ind_len;
293     int		line_len = 0;
294     int		tab_pad;
295     int		ind_done;
296     int		round;
297 
298     /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent
299      * Round 2: copy the characters. */
300     for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round)
301     {
302 	todo = size;
303 	ind_len = 0;
304 	ind_done = 0;
305 	s = src;
306 
307 	/* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */
308 	while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s))
309 	{
310 	    if (*s == TAB)
311 	    {
312 		tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
313 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
314 		/* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
315 		if (todo < tab_pad)
316 		    break;
317 		todo -= tab_pad;
318 		ind_done += tab_pad;
319 	    }
320 	    else
321 	    {
322 		--todo;
323 		++ind_done;
324 	    }
325 	    ++ind_len;
326 	    if (round == 2)
327 		*p++ = *s;
328 	    ++s;
329 	}
330 
331 	/* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
332 	tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
333 	if (todo >= tab_pad)
334 	{
335 	    todo -= tab_pad;
336 	    ++ind_len;
337 	    if (round == 2)
338 		*p++ = TAB;
339 	}
340 
341 	/* Add tabs required for indent */
342 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
343 	{
344 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
345 	    ++ind_len;
346 	    if (round == 2)
347 		*p++ = TAB;
348 	}
349 
350 	/* Count/add spaces required for indent */
351 	while (todo > 0)
352 	{
353 	    --todo;
354 	    ++ind_len;
355 	    if (round == 2)
356 		*p++ = ' ';
357 	}
358 
359 	if (round == 1)
360 	{
361 	    /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent
362 	     * and the rest of the line. */
363 	    line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1;
364 	    line = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
365 	    if (line == NULL)
366 		return FALSE;
367 	    p = line;
368 	}
369     }
370 
371     /* Append the original line */
372     mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len);
373 
374     /* Replace the line */
375     ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE);
376 
377     /* Put the cursor after the indent. */
378     curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
379     return TRUE;
380 }
381 
382 /*
383  * Return the indent of the current line after a number.  Return -1 if no
384  * number was found.  Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list.
385  */
386     int
387 get_number_indent(lnum)
388     linenr_T	lnum;
389 {
390     char_u	*line;
391     char_u	*p;
392     colnr_T	col;
393     pos_T	pos;
394 
395     if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
396 	return -1;
397     line = ml_get(lnum);
398     p = skipwhite(line);
399     if (!VIM_ISDIGIT(*p))
400 	return -1;
401     p = skipdigits(p);
402     if (vim_strchr((char_u *)":.)]}\t ", *p) == NULL)
403 	return -1;
404     p = skipwhite(p + 1);
405     if (*p == NUL)
406 	return -1;
407     pos.lnum = lnum;
408     pos.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
409     getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
410     return (int)col;
411 }
412 
413 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT)
414 
415 static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line));
416 
417 /*
418  * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'.
419  */
420     static int
421 cin_is_cinword(line)
422     char_u	*line;
423 {
424     char_u	*cinw;
425     char_u	*cinw_buf;
426     int		cinw_len;
427     int		retval = FALSE;
428     int		len;
429 
430     cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1;
431     cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len);
432     if (cinw_buf != NULL)
433     {
434 	line = skipwhite(line);
435 	for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; )
436 	{
437 	    len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ",");
438 	    if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0
439 		    && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1])))
440 	    {
441 		retval = TRUE;
442 		break;
443 	    }
444 	}
445 	vim_free(cinw_buf);
446     }
447     return retval;
448 }
449 #endif
450 
451 /*
452  * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line.
453  *
454  * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the
455  * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line.
456  *
457  * Caller must take care of undo.  Since VREPLACE may affect any number of
458  * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a
459  * new line.
460  * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES	delete spaces after cursor
461  *	    OPENLINE_DO_COM	format comments
462  *	    OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL	keep trailing spaces
463  *	    OPENLINE_MARKFIX	adjust mark positions after the line break
464  *
465  * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure
466  */
467     int
468 open_line(dir, flags, old_indent)
469     int		dir;		/* FORWARD or BACKWARD */
470     int		flags;
471     int		old_indent;	/* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */
472 {
473     char_u	*saved_line;		/* copy of the original line */
474     char_u	*next_line = NULL;	/* copy of the next line */
475     char_u	*p_extra = NULL;	/* what goes to next line */
476     int		less_cols = 0;		/* less columns for mark in new line */
477     int		less_cols_off = 0;	/* columns to skip for mark adjust */
478     pos_T	old_cursor;		/* old cursor position */
479     int		newcol = 0;		/* new cursor column */
480     int		newindent = 0;		/* auto-indent of the new line */
481     int		n;
482     int		trunc_line = FALSE;	/* truncate current line afterwards */
483     int		retval = FALSE;		/* return value, default is FAIL */
484 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
485     int		extra_len = 0;		/* length of p_extra string */
486     int		lead_len;		/* length of comment leader */
487     char_u	*lead_flags;	/* position in 'comments' for comment leader */
488     char_u	*leader = NULL;		/* copy of comment leader */
489 #endif
490     char_u	*allocated = NULL;	/* allocated memory */
491 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \
492 	|| defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
493     char_u	*p;
494 #endif
495     int		saved_char = NUL;	/* init for GCC */
496 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
497     pos_T	*pos;
498 #endif
499 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
500     int		do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si
501 # ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
502 					&& !curbuf->b_p_cin
503 # endif
504 			);
505     int		no_si = FALSE;		/* reset did_si afterwards */
506     int		first_char = NUL;	/* init for GCC */
507 #endif
508 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
509     int		vreplace_mode;
510 #endif
511     int		did_append;		/* appended a new line */
512     int		saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */
513 
514     /*
515      * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it
516      */
517     saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
518     if (saved_line == NULL)	    /* out of memory! */
519 	return FALSE;
520 
521 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
522     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
523     {
524 	/*
525 	 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be
526 	 * starting to replace.  First make the new line empty and let vim play
527 	 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content.  Then
528 	 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the
529 	 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto
530 	 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right
531 	 * stuff onto the replace stack.  -- webb.
532 	 */
533 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count)
534 	    next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1));
535 	else
536 	    next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
537 	if (next_line == NULL)	    /* out of memory! */
538 	    goto theend;
539 
540 	/*
541 	 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts
542 	 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the
543 	 * line onto the replace stack.  We'll push any other characters that
544 	 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent
545 	 * etc) a bit later.
546 	 */
547 	replace_push(NUL);  /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */
548 	replace_push(NUL);
549 	p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
550 	while (*p != NUL)
551 	    replace_push(*p++);
552 	saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
553     }
554 #endif
555 
556     if ((State & INSERT)
557 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
558 	    && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
559 #endif
560 	    )
561     {
562 	p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
563 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
564 	if (do_si)		/* need first char after new line break */
565 	{
566 	    p = skipwhite(p_extra);
567 	    first_char = *p;
568 	}
569 #endif
570 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
571 	extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra);
572 #endif
573 	saved_char = *p_extra;
574 	*p_extra = NUL;
575     }
576 
577     u_clearline();		/* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */
578 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
579     did_si = FALSE;
580 #endif
581     ai_col = 0;
582 
583     /*
584      * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on
585      * the prior line, and it should be truncated.  Do this even if 'ai' is not
586      * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai.
587      */
588     if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai)
589 	trunc_line = TRUE;
590 
591     /*
592      * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what
593      * indent to use for the new line.
594      */
595     if (curbuf->b_p_ai
596 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
597 			|| do_si
598 #endif
599 					    )
600     {
601 	/*
602 	 * count white space on current line
603 	 */
604 	newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
605 	if (newindent == 0)
606 	    newindent = old_indent;	/* for ^^D command in insert mode */
607 
608 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
609 	/*
610 	 * Do smart indenting.
611 	 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD)
612 	 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{'
613 	 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line
614 	 *	"if (condition) {"
615 	 */
616 	if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL
617 				    && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{'))
618 	{
619 	    char_u  *ptr;
620 	    char_u  last_char;
621 
622 	    old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
623 	    ptr = saved_line;
624 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
625 	    if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
626 		lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
627 	    else
628 		lead_len = 0;
629 # endif
630 	    if (dir == FORWARD)
631 	    {
632 		/*
633 		 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
634 		 * recognised as comments.
635 		 */
636 		if (
637 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
638 			lead_len == 0 &&
639 # endif
640 			ptr[0] == '#')
641 		{
642 		    while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
643 			ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
644 		    newindent = get_indent();
645 		}
646 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
647 		if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
648 		    lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
649 		else
650 		    lead_len = 0;
651 		if (lead_len > 0)
652 		{
653 		    /*
654 		     * This case gets the following right:
655 		     *	    \*
656 		     *	     * A comment (read '\' as '/').
657 		     *	     *\
658 		     * #define IN_THE_WAY
659 		     *	    This should line up here;
660 		     */
661 		    p = skipwhite(ptr);
662 		    if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*')
663 			p++;
664 		    if (p[0] == '*')
665 		    {
666 			for (p++; *p; p++)
667 			{
668 			    if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*')
669 			    {
670 				/*
671 				 * End of C comment, indent should line up
672 				 * with the line containing the start of
673 				 * the comment
674 				 */
675 				curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
676 				if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
677 				{
678 				    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
679 				    newindent = get_indent();
680 				}
681 			    }
682 			}
683 		    }
684 		}
685 		else	/* Not a comment line */
686 # endif
687 		{
688 		    /* Find last non-blank in line */
689 		    p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1;
690 		    while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
691 			--p;
692 		    last_char = *p;
693 
694 		    /*
695 		     * find the character just before the '{' or ';'
696 		     */
697 		    if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';')
698 		    {
699 			if (p > ptr)
700 			    --p;
701 			while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
702 			    --p;
703 		    }
704 		    /*
705 		     * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple
706 		     * lines.  eg:
707 		     *	    if (condition &&
708 		     *			condition) {
709 		     *		Should line up here!
710 		     *	    }
711 		     */
712 		    if (*p == ')')
713 		    {
714 			curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
715 			if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL)
716 			{
717 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
718 			    newindent = get_indent();
719 			    ptr = ml_get_curline();
720 			}
721 		    }
722 		    /*
723 		     * If last character is '{' do indent, without
724 		     * checking for "if" and the like.
725 		     */
726 		    if (last_char == '{')
727 		    {
728 			did_si = TRUE;	/* do indent */
729 			no_si = TRUE;	/* don't delete it when '{' typed */
730 		    }
731 		    /*
732 		     * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'.
733 		     * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or
734 		     * '}'.
735 		     */
736 		    else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}'
737 						       && cin_is_cinword(ptr))
738 			did_si = TRUE;
739 		}
740 	    }
741 	    else /* dir == BACKWARD */
742 	    {
743 		/*
744 		 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
745 		 * recognised as comments.
746 		 */
747 		if (
748 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
749 			lead_len == 0 &&
750 # endif
751 			ptr[0] == '#')
752 		{
753 		    int was_backslashed = FALSE;
754 
755 		    while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) &&
756 			 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
757 		    {
758 			if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\')
759 			    was_backslashed = TRUE;
760 			else
761 			    was_backslashed = FALSE;
762 			ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
763 		    }
764 		    if (was_backslashed)
765 			newindent = 0;	    /* Got to end of file */
766 		    else
767 			newindent = get_indent();
768 		}
769 		p = skipwhite(ptr);
770 		if (*p == '}')	    /* if line starts with '}': do indent */
771 		    did_si = TRUE;
772 		else		    /* can delete indent when '{' typed */
773 		    can_si_back = TRUE;
774 	    }
775 	    curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
776 	}
777 	if (do_si)
778 	    can_si = TRUE;
779 #endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */
780 
781 	did_ai = TRUE;
782     }
783 
784 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
785     /*
786      * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader.
787      * This may then be inserted in front of the new line.
788      */
789     end_comment_pending = NUL;
790     if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
791 	lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD);
792     else
793 	lead_len = 0;
794     if (lead_len > 0)
795     {
796 	char_u	*lead_repl = NULL;	    /* replaces comment leader */
797 	int	lead_repl_len = 0;	    /* length of *lead_repl */
798 	char_u	lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN];   /* middle-comment string */
799 	char_u	lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN];	    /* end-comment string */
800 	char_u	*comment_end = NULL;	    /* where lead_end has been found */
801 	int	extra_space = FALSE;	    /* append extra space */
802 	int	current_flag;
803 	int	require_blank = FALSE;	    /* requires blank after middle */
804 	char_u	*p2;
805 
806 	/*
807 	 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not
808 	 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader.
809 	 */
810 	for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
811 	{
812 	    if (*p == COM_BLANK)
813 	    {
814 		require_blank = TRUE;
815 		continue;
816 	    }
817 	    if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
818 	    {
819 		current_flag = *p;
820 		if (*p == COM_START)
821 		{
822 		    /*
823 		     * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader.
824 		     */
825 		    if (dir == BACKWARD)
826 		    {
827 			lead_len = 0;
828 			break;
829 		    }
830 
831 		    /* find start of middle part */
832 		    (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
833 		    require_blank = FALSE;
834 		}
835 
836 		/*
837 		 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader.
838 		 */
839 		while (*p && p[-1] != ':')	/* find end of middle flags */
840 		{
841 		    if (*p == COM_BLANK)
842 			require_blank = TRUE;
843 		    ++p;
844 		}
845 		(void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
846 
847 		while (*p && p[-1] != ':')	/* find end of end flags */
848 		{
849 		    /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
850 		    if (*p == COM_AUTO_END)
851 			end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
852 		    ++p;
853 		}
854 		n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
855 
856 		if (end_comment_pending == -1)	/* we can set it now */
857 		    end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1];
858 
859 		/*
860 		 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use
861 		 * the comment leader.
862 		 */
863 		if (dir == FORWARD)
864 		{
865 		    for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p)
866 			if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0)
867 			{
868 			    comment_end = p;
869 			    lead_len = 0;
870 			    break;
871 			}
872 		}
873 
874 		/*
875 		 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader.
876 		 */
877 		if (lead_len > 0)
878 		{
879 		    if (current_flag == COM_START)
880 		    {
881 			lead_repl = lead_middle;
882 			lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
883 		    }
884 
885 		    /*
886 		     * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start
887 		     * comment leader, then put a space after the middle
888 		     * comment leader on the next line.
889 		     */
890 		    if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1])
891 			    && ((p_extra != NULL
892 				    && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len)
893 				|| (p_extra == NULL
894 				    && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL)
895 				|| require_blank))
896 			extra_space = TRUE;
897 		}
898 		break;
899 	    }
900 	    if (*p == COM_END)
901 	    {
902 		/*
903 		 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader.
904 		 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the
905 		 * start (for C-comments).
906 		 */
907 		if (dir == FORWARD)
908 		{
909 		    comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line);
910 		    lead_len = 0;
911 		    break;
912 		}
913 
914 		/*
915 		 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader.
916 		 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards.
917 		 */
918 		while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',')
919 		    --p;
920 		for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com
921 					 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl)
922 		    ;
923 		lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl);
924 
925 		/* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on
926 		 * the comment-end */
927 		extra_space = TRUE;
928 
929 		/* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
930 		for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++)
931 		{
932 		    if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END)
933 			end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
934 		}
935 		if (end_comment_pending == -1)
936 		{
937 		    /* Find last character in end-comment string */
938 		    while (*p2 && *p2 != ',')
939 			p2++;
940 		    end_comment_pending = p2[-1];
941 		}
942 		break;
943 	    }
944 	    if (*p == COM_FIRST)
945 	    {
946 		/*
947 		 * Comment leader for first line only:	Don't repeat leader
948 		 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o".
949 		 */
950 		if (dir == BACKWARD)
951 		    lead_len = 0;
952 		else
953 		{
954 		    lead_repl = (char_u *)"";
955 		    lead_repl_len = 0;
956 		}
957 		break;
958 	    }
959 	}
960 	if (lead_len)
961 	{
962 	    /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */
963 	    leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space +
964 							      extra_len + 1);
965 	    allocated = leader;		    /* remember to free it later */
966 
967 	    if (leader == NULL)
968 		lead_len = 0;
969 	    else
970 	    {
971 		STRNCPY(leader, saved_line, lead_len);
972 		leader[lead_len] = NUL;
973 
974 		/*
975 		 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted
976 		 */
977 		if (lead_repl != NULL)
978 		{
979 		    int		c = 0;
980 		    int		off = 0;
981 
982 		    for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
983 		    {
984 			if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT)
985 			    c = *p;
986 			else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
987 			    off = getdigits(&p);
988 		    }
989 		    if (c == COM_RIGHT)    /* right adjusted leader */
990 		    {
991 			/* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */
992 			for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader
993 						      && vim_iswhite(*p); --p)
994 			    ;
995 			++p;
996 
997 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
998 			/* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
999 			 * screen characters, not bytes. */
1000 			{
1001 			    int	    repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1002 							       lead_repl_len);
1003 			    int	    old_size = 0;
1004 			    char_u  *endp = p;
1005 			    int	    l;
1006 
1007 			    while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader)
1008 			    {
1009 				--p;
1010 				p -= mb_head_off(leader, p);
1011 				old_size += ptr2cells(p);
1012 			    }
1013 			    l = lead_repl_len - (endp - p);
1014 			    if (l != 0)
1015 				mch_memmove(endp + l, endp,
1016 					(size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp));
1017 			    lead_len += l;
1018 			}
1019 #else
1020 			if (p < leader + lead_repl_len)
1021 			    p = leader;
1022 			else
1023 			    p -= lead_repl_len;
1024 #endif
1025 			mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1026 			if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len)
1027 			    p[lead_repl_len] = NUL;
1028 
1029 			/* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */
1030 			while (--p >= leader)
1031 			{
1032 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1033 			    int l = mb_head_off(leader, p);
1034 
1035 			    if (l > 1)
1036 			    {
1037 				p -= l;
1038 				if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1039 				{
1040 				    p[1] = ' ';
1041 				    --l;
1042 				}
1043 				mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1,
1044 				   (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1)));
1045 				lead_len -= l;
1046 				*p = ' ';
1047 			    }
1048 			    else
1049 #endif
1050 			    if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1051 				*p = ' ';
1052 			}
1053 		    }
1054 		    else		    /* left adjusted leader */
1055 		    {
1056 			p = skipwhite(leader);
1057 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1058 			/* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1059 			 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is
1060 			 * not to be overwritten. */
1061 			{
1062 			    int	    repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1063 							       lead_repl_len);
1064 			    int	    i;
1065 			    int	    l;
1066 
1067 			    for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l)
1068 			    {
1069 				l = mb_ptr2len_check(p + i);
1070 				if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size)
1071 				    break;
1072 			    }
1073 			    if (i != lead_repl_len)
1074 			    {
1075 				mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i,
1076 				       (size_t)(lead_len - i - (leader - p)));
1077 				lead_len += lead_repl_len - i;
1078 			    }
1079 			}
1080 #endif
1081 			mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1082 
1083 			/* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old
1084 			 * leader by spaces.  Keep Tabs, the indent must
1085 			 * remain the same. */
1086 			for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p)
1087 			    if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1088 			    {
1089 				/* Don't put a space before a TAB. */
1090 				if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB)
1091 				{
1092 				    --lead_len;
1093 				    mch_memmove(p, p + 1,
1094 						     (leader + lead_len) - p);
1095 				}
1096 				else
1097 				{
1098 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1099 				    int	    l = mb_ptr2len_check(p);
1100 
1101 				    if (l > 1)
1102 				    {
1103 					if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1104 					{
1105 					    /* Replace a double-wide char with
1106 					     * two spaces */
1107 					    --l;
1108 					    *p++ = ' ';
1109 					}
1110 					mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l,
1111 						     (leader + lead_len) - p);
1112 					lead_len -= l - 1;
1113 				    }
1114 #endif
1115 				    *p = ' ';
1116 				}
1117 			    }
1118 			*p = NUL;
1119 		    }
1120 
1121 		    /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */
1122 		    if (curbuf->b_p_ai
1123 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1124 					|| do_si
1125 #endif
1126 							   )
1127 			newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
1128 
1129 		    /* Add the indent offset */
1130 		    if (newindent + off < 0)
1131 		    {
1132 			off = -newindent;
1133 			newindent = 0;
1134 		    }
1135 		    else
1136 			newindent += off;
1137 
1138 		    /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that
1139 		     * alignment remains equal. */
1140 		    while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0
1141 					       && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ')
1142 		    {
1143 			/* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */
1144 			if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL)
1145 			    break;
1146 			--lead_len;
1147 			--off;
1148 		    }
1149 
1150 		    /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an
1151 		     * extra space */
1152 		    if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1]))
1153 			extra_space = FALSE;
1154 		    leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1155 		}
1156 
1157 		if (extra_space)
1158 		{
1159 		    leader[lead_len++] = ' ';
1160 		    leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1161 		}
1162 
1163 		newcol = lead_len;
1164 
1165 		/*
1166 		 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that
1167 		 * is in the comment leader
1168 		 */
1169 		if (newindent
1170 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1171 				|| did_si
1172 #endif
1173 					   )
1174 		{
1175 		    while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader))
1176 		    {
1177 			--lead_len;
1178 			--newcol;
1179 			++leader;
1180 		    }
1181 		}
1182 
1183 	    }
1184 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1185 	    did_si = can_si = FALSE;
1186 #endif
1187 	}
1188 	else if (comment_end != NULL)
1189 	{
1190 	    /*
1191 	     * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader.
1192 	     * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal
1193 	     * indent to align with the line containing the start of the
1194 	     * comment.
1195 	     */
1196 	    if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' &&
1197 			(curbuf->b_p_ai
1198 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1199 					|| do_si
1200 #endif
1201 							   ))
1202 	    {
1203 		old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1204 		curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line);
1205 		if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
1206 		{
1207 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
1208 		    newindent = get_indent();
1209 		}
1210 		curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1211 	    }
1212 	}
1213     }
1214 #endif
1215 
1216     /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */
1217     if (p_extra != NULL)
1218     {
1219 	*p_extra = saved_char;		/* restore char that NUL replaced */
1220 
1221 	/*
1222 	 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first
1223 	 * non-blank.
1224 	 *
1225 	 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack,
1226 	 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered.
1227 	 */
1228 	if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1229 	    replace_push(NUL);	    /* end of extra blanks */
1230 	if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES))
1231 	{
1232 	    while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t')
1233 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1234 		    && (!enc_utf8
1235 			       || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1)))
1236 #endif
1237 		    )
1238 	    {
1239 		if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1240 		    replace_push(*p_extra);
1241 		++p_extra;
1242 		++less_cols_off;
1243 	    }
1244 	}
1245 	if (*p_extra != NUL)
1246 	    did_ai = FALSE;	    /* append some text, don't truncate now */
1247 
1248 	/* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */
1249 	less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line);
1250     }
1251 
1252     if (p_extra == NULL)
1253 	p_extra = (char_u *)"";		    /* append empty line */
1254 
1255 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1256     /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */
1257     if (lead_len)
1258     {
1259 	STRCAT(leader, p_extra);
1260 	p_extra = leader;
1261 	did_ai = TRUE;	    /* So truncating blanks works with comments */
1262 	less_cols -= lead_len;
1263     }
1264     else
1265 	end_comment_pending = NUL;  /* turns out there was no leader */
1266 #endif
1267 
1268     old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1269     if (dir == BACKWARD)
1270 	--curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1271 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1272     if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count)
1273 #endif
1274     {
1275 	if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE)
1276 								      == FAIL)
1277 	    goto theend;
1278 	/* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding
1279 	 * with markers. */
1280 	mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L);
1281 	did_append = TRUE;
1282     }
1283 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1284     else
1285     {
1286 	/*
1287 	 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line.
1288 	 */
1289 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum++;
1290 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed)
1291 	{
1292 	    /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL
1293 	     * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice.
1294 	     */
1295 	    (void)u_save_cursor();		    /* errors are ignored! */
1296 	    vr_lines_changed++;
1297 	}
1298 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE);
1299 	changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
1300 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
1301 	did_append = FALSE;
1302     }
1303 #endif
1304 
1305     if (newindent
1306 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1307 		    || did_si
1308 #endif
1309 				)
1310     {
1311 	++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1312 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1313 	if (did_si)
1314 	{
1315 	    if (p_sr)
1316 		newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1317 	    newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1318 	}
1319 #endif
1320 	/* Copy the indent only if expand tab is disabled */
1321 	if (curbuf->b_p_ci && !curbuf->b_p_et)
1322 	{
1323 	    (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line);
1324 
1325 	    /*
1326 	     * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing
1327 	     * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve
1328 	     * it.  It gets restored at the function end.
1329 	     */
1330 	    curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE;
1331 	}
1332 	else
1333 	    (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT);
1334 	less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col;
1335 
1336 	ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1337 
1338 	/*
1339 	 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must
1340 	 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS
1341 	 */
1342 	if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1343 	    for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n)
1344 		replace_push(NUL);
1345 	newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col;
1346 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1347 	if (no_si)
1348 	    did_si = FALSE;
1349 #endif
1350     }
1351 
1352 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1353     /*
1354      * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be
1355      * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS.
1356      */
1357     if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1358 	while (lead_len-- > 0)
1359 	    replace_push(NUL);
1360 #endif
1361 
1362     curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1363 
1364     if (dir == FORWARD)
1365     {
1366 	if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT))
1367 	{
1368 	    /* truncate current line at cursor */
1369 	    saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
1370 	    /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */
1371 	    if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL))
1372 		truncate_spaces(saved_line);
1373 	    ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE);
1374 	    saved_line = NULL;
1375 	    if (did_append)
1376 	    {
1377 		changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col,
1378 					       curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L);
1379 		did_append = FALSE;
1380 
1381 		/* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */
1382 		if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX)
1383 		    mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
1384 					 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off,
1385 							1L, (long)-less_cols);
1386 	    }
1387 	    else
1388 		changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
1389 	}
1390 
1391 	/*
1392 	 * Put the cursor on the new line.  Careful: the scrollup() above may
1393 	 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor.
1394 	 */
1395 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1;
1396     }
1397     if (did_append)
1398 	changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L);
1399 
1400     curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol;
1401 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1402     curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1403 #endif
1404 
1405 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1406     /*
1407      * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop
1408      * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in
1409      * normal INSERT mode.
1410      */
1411     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1412     {
1413 	vreplace_mode = State;	/* So we know to put things right later */
1414 	State = INSERT;
1415     }
1416     else
1417 	vreplace_mode = 0;
1418 #endif
1419 #ifdef FEAT_LISP
1420     /*
1421      * May do lisp indenting.
1422      */
1423     if (!p_paste
1424 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1425 	    && leader == NULL
1426 # endif
1427 	    && curbuf->b_p_lisp
1428 	    && curbuf->b_p_ai)
1429     {
1430 	fixthisline(get_lisp_indent);
1431 	p = ml_get_curline();
1432 	ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1433     }
1434 #endif
1435 #ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
1436     /*
1437      * May do indenting after opening a new line.
1438      */
1439     if (!p_paste
1440 	    && (curbuf->b_p_cin
1441 #  ifdef FEAT_EVAL
1442 		    || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL
1443 #  endif
1444 		)
1445 	    && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD
1446 		? KEY_OPEN_FORW
1447 		: KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)))
1448     {
1449 	do_c_expr_indent();
1450 	p = ml_get_curline();
1451 	ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1452     }
1453 #endif
1454 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1455     if (vreplace_mode != 0)
1456 	State = vreplace_mode;
1457 #endif
1458 
1459 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1460     /*
1461      * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the
1462      * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff
1463      * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()).
1464      */
1465     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1466     {
1467 	/* Put new line in p_extra */
1468 	p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
1469 	if (p_extra == NULL)
1470 	    goto theend;
1471 
1472 	/* Put back original line */
1473 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE);
1474 
1475 	/* Insert new stuff into line again */
1476 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
1477 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1478 	curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1479 #endif
1480 	ins_bytes(p_extra);	/* will call changed_bytes() */
1481 	vim_free(p_extra);
1482 	next_line = NULL;
1483     }
1484 #endif
1485 
1486     retval = TRUE;		/* success! */
1487 theend:
1488     curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi;
1489     vim_free(saved_line);
1490     vim_free(next_line);
1491     vim_free(allocated);
1492     return retval;
1493 }
1494 
1495 #if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO)
1496 /*
1497  * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string
1498  * which introduces a comment.	If this string is not a comment then 0 is
1499  * returned.
1500  * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized
1501  * comment leader.
1502  * "backward" must be true for the "O" command.
1503  */
1504     int
1505 get_leader_len(line, flags, backward)
1506     char_u	*line;
1507     char_u	**flags;
1508     int		backward;
1509 {
1510     int		i, j;
1511     int		got_com = FALSE;
1512     int		found_one;
1513     char_u	part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* buffer for one option part */
1514     char_u	*string;		/* pointer to comment string */
1515     char_u	*list;
1516 
1517     i = 0;
1518     while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))    /* leading white space is ignored */
1519 	++i;
1520 
1521     /*
1522      * Repeat to match several nested comment strings.
1523      */
1524     while (line[i])
1525     {
1526 	/*
1527 	 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match
1528 	 */
1529 	found_one = FALSE;
1530 	for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
1531 	{
1532 	    /*
1533 	     * Get one option part into part_buf[].  Advance list to next one.
1534 	     * put string at start of string.
1535 	     */
1536 	    if (!got_com && flags != NULL)  /* remember where flags started */
1537 		*flags = list;
1538 	    (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
1539 	    string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':');
1540 	    if (string == NULL)	    /* missing ':', ignore this part */
1541 		continue;
1542 	    *string++ = NUL;	    /* isolate flags from string */
1543 
1544 	    /*
1545 	     * When already found a nested comment, only accept further
1546 	     * nested comments.
1547 	     */
1548 	    if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1549 		continue;
1550 
1551 	    /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */
1552 	    if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL)
1553 		continue;
1554 
1555 	    /*
1556 	     * Line contents and string must match.
1557 	     * When string starts with white space, must have some white space
1558 	     * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of
1559 	     * TABs and spaces).
1560 	     */
1561 	    if (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1562 	    {
1563 		if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1]))
1564 		    continue;
1565 		while (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1566 		    ++string;
1567 	    }
1568 	    for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j)
1569 		;
1570 	    if (string[j] != NUL)
1571 		continue;
1572 
1573 	    /*
1574 	     * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an
1575 	     * end-of-line after the string in the line.
1576 	     */
1577 	    if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL
1578 			   && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL)
1579 		continue;
1580 
1581 	    /*
1582 	     * We have found a match, stop searching.
1583 	     */
1584 	    i += j;
1585 	    got_com = TRUE;
1586 	    found_one = TRUE;
1587 	    break;
1588 	}
1589 
1590 	/*
1591 	 * No match found, stop scanning.
1592 	 */
1593 	if (!found_one)
1594 	    break;
1595 
1596 	/*
1597 	 * Include any trailing white space.
1598 	 */
1599 	while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))
1600 	    ++i;
1601 
1602 	/*
1603 	 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here.
1604 	 */
1605 	if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1606 	    break;
1607     }
1608     return (got_com ? i : 0);
1609 }
1610 #endif
1611 
1612 /*
1613  * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum".
1614  */
1615     int
1616 plines(lnum)
1617     linenr_T	lnum;
1618 {
1619     return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1620 }
1621 
1622     int
1623 plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight)
1624     win_T	*wp;
1625     linenr_T	lnum;
1626     int		winheight;	/* when TRUE limit to window height */
1627 {
1628 #if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO)
1629     /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line.  When folded the result
1630      * is one line anyway. */
1631     return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1632 }
1633 
1634     int
1635 plines_nofill(lnum)
1636     linenr_T	lnum;
1637 {
1638     return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1639 }
1640 
1641     int
1642 plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight)
1643     win_T	*wp;
1644     linenr_T	lnum;
1645     int		winheight;	/* when TRUE limit to window height */
1646 {
1647 #endif
1648     int		lines;
1649 
1650     if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1651 	return 1;
1652 
1653 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1654     if (wp->w_width == 0)
1655 	return 1;
1656 #endif
1657 
1658 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1659     /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */
1660     /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */
1661     if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE)
1662 	return 1;
1663 #endif
1664 
1665     lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum);
1666     if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height)
1667 	return (int)wp->w_height;
1668     return lines;
1669 }
1670 
1671 /*
1672  * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window
1673  * "wp".  Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'.
1674  */
1675     int
1676 plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum)
1677     win_T	*wp;
1678     linenr_T	lnum;
1679 {
1680     char_u	*s;
1681     long	col;
1682     int		width;
1683 
1684     s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1685     if (*s == NUL)		/* empty line */
1686 	return 1;
1687     col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL);
1688 
1689     /*
1690      * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one
1691      * extra column.
1692      */
1693     if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL)
1694 	col += 1;
1695 
1696     /*
1697      * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'.
1698      */
1699     width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1700     if (width <= 0)
1701 	return 32000;
1702     if (col <= width)
1703 	return 1;
1704     col -= width;
1705     width += win_col_off2(wp);
1706     return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1;
1707 }
1708 
1709 /*
1710  * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines
1711  * used from the start of the line to the given column number.
1712  */
1713     int
1714 plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column)
1715     win_T	*wp;
1716     linenr_T	lnum;
1717     long	column;
1718 {
1719     long	col;
1720     char_u	*s;
1721     int		lines = 0;
1722     int		width;
1723 
1724 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1725     /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line.  When folded the result
1726      * is one line anyway. */
1727     lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1728 #endif
1729 
1730     if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1731 	return lines + 1;
1732 
1733 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1734     if (wp->w_width == 0)
1735 	return lines + 1;
1736 #endif
1737 
1738     s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1739 
1740     col = 0;
1741     while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0)
1742     {
1743 	col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL);
1744 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1745 	if (has_mbyte)
1746 	    s += (*mb_ptr2len_check)(s);
1747 	else
1748 #endif
1749 	    ++s;
1750     }
1751 
1752     /*
1753      * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in
1754      * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last
1755      * screen position of the TAB.  This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps
1756      * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of
1757      * 'ts') -- webb.
1758      */
1759     if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1))
1760 	col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1;
1761 
1762     /*
1763      * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc.
1764      */
1765     width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1766     if (width > 0)
1767     {
1768 	lines += 1;
1769 	if (col >= width)
1770 	    lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp));
1771 	if (lines <= wp->w_height)
1772 	    return lines;
1773     }
1774     return (int)(wp->w_height);	    /* maximum length */
1775 }
1776 
1777     int
1778 plines_m_win(wp, first, last)
1779     win_T	*wp;
1780     linenr_T	first, last;
1781 {
1782     int		count = 0;
1783 
1784     while (first <= last)
1785     {
1786 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1787 	int	x;
1788 
1789 	/* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines
1790 	 * that are maybe folded. */
1791 	x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL);
1792 	if (x > 0)
1793 	{
1794 	    ++count;	    /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */
1795 	    first += x;
1796 	}
1797 	else
1798 #endif
1799 	{
1800 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1801 	    if (first == wp->w_topline)
1802 		count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill;
1803 	    else
1804 #endif
1805 		count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE);
1806 	    ++first;
1807 	}
1808     }
1809     return (count);
1810 }
1811 
1812 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO)
1813 /*
1814  * Insert string "p" at the cursor position.  Stops at a NUL byte.
1815  * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1816  */
1817     void
1818 ins_bytes(p)
1819     char_u	*p;
1820 {
1821     ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p));
1822 }
1823 #endif
1824 
1825 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \
1826 	|| defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1827 /*
1828  * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position.
1829  * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1830  */
1831     void
1832 ins_bytes_len(p, len)
1833     char_u	*p;
1834     int		len;
1835 {
1836     int		i;
1837 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1838     int		n;
1839 
1840     for (i = 0; i < len; i += n)
1841     {
1842 	n = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p + i);
1843 	ins_char_bytes(p + i, n);
1844     }
1845 # else
1846     for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
1847 	ins_char(p[i]);
1848 # endif
1849 }
1850 #endif
1851 
1852 /*
1853  * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position.
1854  * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character.
1855  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
1856  * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must
1857  * convert bytes to a character.
1858  */
1859     void
1860 ins_char(c)
1861     int		c;
1862 {
1863 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1864     char_u	buf[MB_MAXBYTES];
1865     int		n;
1866 
1867     n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf);
1868 
1869     /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte.
1870      * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */
1871     if (buf[0] == 0)
1872 	buf[0] = '\n';
1873 
1874     ins_char_bytes(buf, n);
1875 }
1876 
1877     void
1878 ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen)
1879     char_u	*buf;
1880     int		charlen;
1881 {
1882     int		c = buf[0];
1883     int		l, j;
1884 #endif
1885     int		newlen;		/* nr of bytes inserted */
1886     int		oldlen;		/* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */
1887     char_u	*p;
1888     char_u	*newp;
1889     char_u	*oldp;
1890     int		linelen;	/* length of old line including NUL */
1891     colnr_T	col;
1892     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1893     int		i;
1894 
1895 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1896     /* Break tabs if needed. */
1897     if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
1898 	coladvance_force(getviscol());
1899 #endif
1900 
1901     col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1902     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
1903     linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1;
1904 
1905     /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */
1906     oldlen = 0;
1907 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1908     newlen = charlen;
1909 #else
1910     newlen = 1;
1911 #endif
1912 
1913     if (State & REPLACE_FLAG)
1914     {
1915 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1916 	if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1917 	{
1918 	    colnr_T	new_vcol = 0;   /* init for GCC */
1919 	    colnr_T	vcol;
1920 	    int		old_list;
1921 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1922 	    char_u	buf[2];
1923 #endif
1924 
1925 	    /*
1926 	     * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag.
1927 	     * Returns the old value of list, so when finished,
1928 	     * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this.
1929 	     */
1930 	    old_list = curwin->w_p_list;
1931 	    if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL)
1932 		curwin->w_p_list = FALSE;
1933 
1934 	    /*
1935 	     * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more
1936 	     * characters (zero if it's a TAB).  Count the number of bytes to
1937 	     * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen
1938 	     * cells.  May result in adding spaces to fill a gap.
1939 	     */
1940 	    getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL);
1941 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1942 	    buf[0] = c;
1943 	    buf[1] = NUL;
1944 #endif
1945 	    new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol);
1946 	    while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol)
1947 	    {
1948 		vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol);
1949 		/* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right
1950 		 * position. */
1951 		if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB)
1952 		    break;
1953 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1954 		oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col + oldlen);
1955 #else
1956 		++oldlen;
1957 #endif
1958 		/* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */
1959 		if (vcol > new_vcol)
1960 		    newlen += vcol - new_vcol;
1961 	    }
1962 	    curwin->w_p_list = old_list;
1963 	}
1964 	else
1965 #endif
1966 	    if (oldp[col] != NUL)
1967 	{
1968 	    /* normal replace */
1969 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1970 	    oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col);
1971 #else
1972 	    oldlen = 1;
1973 #endif
1974 	}
1975 
1976 
1977 	/* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be
1978 	 * put back when BS is used.  The bytes of a multi-byte character are
1979 	 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off
1980 	 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */
1981 	replace_push(NUL);
1982 	for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i)
1983 	{
1984 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1985 	    l = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col + i) - 1;
1986 	    for (j = l; j >= 0; --j)
1987 		replace_push(oldp[col + i + j]);
1988 	    i += l;
1989 #else
1990 	    replace_push(oldp[col + i]);
1991 #endif
1992 	}
1993     }
1994 
1995     newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen));
1996     if (newp == NULL)
1997 	return;
1998 
1999     /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */
2000     if (col > 0)
2001 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2002 
2003     /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */
2004     p = newp + col;
2005     mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen,
2006 					    (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen));
2007 
2008     /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */
2009 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2010     mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen);
2011     i = charlen;
2012 #else
2013     *p = c;
2014     i = 1;
2015 #endif
2016 
2017     /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */
2018     while (i < newlen)
2019 	p[i++] = ' ';
2020 
2021     /* Replace the line in the buffer. */
2022     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2023 
2024     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2025     changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2026 
2027     /*
2028      * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly
2029      * show the match for right parens and braces.
2030      */
2031     if (p_sm && (State & INSERT)
2032 	    && msg_silent == 0
2033 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2034 	    && charlen == 1
2035 #endif
2036        )
2037 	showmatch(c);
2038 
2039 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
2040     if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG))
2041 #endif
2042     {
2043 	/* Normal insert: move cursor right */
2044 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2045 	curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen;
2046 #else
2047 	++curwin->w_cursor.col;
2048 #endif
2049     }
2050     /*
2051      * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later.
2052      */
2053 }
2054 
2055 /*
2056  * Insert a string at the cursor position.
2057  * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode.
2058  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2059  */
2060     void
2061 ins_str(s)
2062     char_u	*s;
2063 {
2064     char_u	*oldp, *newp;
2065     int		newlen = (int)STRLEN(s);
2066     int		oldlen;
2067     colnr_T	col;
2068     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2069 
2070 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2071     if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
2072 	coladvance_force(getviscol());
2073 #endif
2074 
2075     col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2076     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2077     oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2078 
2079     newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1));
2080     if (newp == NULL)
2081 	return;
2082     if (col > 0)
2083 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2084     mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen);
2085     mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1));
2086     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2087     changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2088     curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen;
2089 }
2090 
2091 /*
2092  * Delete one character under the cursor.
2093  * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2094  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2095  *
2096  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2097  */
2098     int
2099 del_char(fixpos)
2100     int		fixpos;
2101 {
2102 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2103     if (has_mbyte)
2104     {
2105 	/* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */
2106 	mb_adjust_cursor();
2107 	if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL)
2108 	    return FAIL;
2109 	return del_chars(1L, fixpos);
2110     }
2111 #endif
2112     return del_bytes(1L, fixpos);
2113 }
2114 
2115 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
2116 /*
2117  * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes.
2118  */
2119     int
2120 del_chars(count, fixpos)
2121     long	count;
2122     int		fixpos;
2123 {
2124     long	bytes = 0;
2125     long	i;
2126     char_u	*p;
2127     int		l;
2128 
2129     p = ml_get_cursor();
2130     for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i)
2131     {
2132 	l = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p);
2133 	bytes += l;
2134 	p += l;
2135     }
2136     return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos);
2137 }
2138 #endif
2139 
2140 /*
2141  * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor.
2142  * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2143  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2144  *
2145  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2146  */
2147     int
2148 del_bytes(count, fixpos)
2149     long	count;
2150     int		fixpos;
2151 {
2152     char_u	*oldp, *newp;
2153     colnr_T	oldlen;
2154     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2155     colnr_T	col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2156     int		was_alloced;
2157     long	movelen;
2158 
2159     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2160     oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2161 
2162     /*
2163      * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line.
2164      */
2165     if (col >= oldlen)
2166 	return FAIL;
2167 
2168 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2169     /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only
2170      * delete the last combining character. */
2171     if (p_deco && enc_utf8 && utfc_ptr2len_check(oldp + col) >= count)
2172     {
2173 	int	c1, c2;
2174 	int	n;
2175 
2176 	(void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, &c1, &c2);
2177 	if (c1 != NUL)
2178 	{
2179 	    /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */
2180 	    n = col;
2181 	    do
2182 	    {
2183 		col = n;
2184 		count = utf_ptr2len_check(oldp + n);
2185 		n += count;
2186 	    } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n));
2187 	    fixpos = 0;
2188 	}
2189     }
2190 #endif
2191 
2192     /*
2193      * When count is too big, reduce it.
2194      */
2195     movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */
2196     if (movelen <= 1)
2197     {
2198 	/*
2199 	 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and
2200 	 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2201 	 */
2202 	if (col > 0 && fixpos)
2203 	{
2204 	    --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2205 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2206 	    curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
2207 #endif
2208 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2209 	    if (has_mbyte)
2210 		curwin->w_cursor.col -=
2211 			    (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col);
2212 #endif
2213 	}
2214 	count = oldlen - col;
2215 	movelen = 1;
2216     }
2217 
2218     /*
2219      * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the
2220      * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated
2221      */
2222     was_alloced = ml_line_alloced();	    /* check if oldp was allocated */
2223 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2224     if (was_alloced && usingNetbeans)
2225 	netbeans_removed(curbuf, lnum, col, count);
2226     /* else is handled by ml_replace() */
2227 #endif
2228     if (was_alloced)
2229 	newp = oldp;			    /* use same allocated memory */
2230     else
2231     {					    /* need to allocate a new line */
2232 	newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count));
2233 	if (newp == NULL)
2234 	    return FAIL;
2235 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2236     }
2237     mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen);
2238     if (!was_alloced)
2239 	ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2240 
2241     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2242     changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2243 
2244     return OK;
2245 }
2246 
2247 /*
2248  * Delete from cursor to end of line.
2249  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2250  *
2251  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2252  */
2253     int
2254 truncate_line(fixpos)
2255     int		fixpos;	    /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */
2256 {
2257     char_u	*newp;
2258     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2259     colnr_T	col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2260 
2261     if (col == 0)
2262 	newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
2263     else
2264 	newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col);
2265 
2266     if (newp == NULL)
2267 	return FAIL;
2268 
2269     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2270 
2271     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2272     changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2273 
2274     /*
2275      * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2276      */
2277     if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0)
2278 	--curwin->w_cursor.col;
2279 
2280     return OK;
2281 }
2282 
2283 /*
2284  * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor.
2285  * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE.
2286  */
2287     void
2288 del_lines(nlines, undo)
2289     long	nlines;		/* number of lines to delete */
2290     int		undo;		/* if TRUE, prepare for undo */
2291 {
2292     long	n;
2293 
2294     if (nlines <= 0)
2295 	return;
2296 
2297     /* save the deleted lines for undo */
2298     if (undo && u_savedel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, nlines) == FAIL)
2299 	return;
2300 
2301     for (n = 0; n < nlines; )
2302     {
2303 	if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY)	    /* nothing to delete */
2304 	    break;
2305 
2306 	ml_delete(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE);
2307 	++n;
2308 
2309 	/* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */
2310 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
2311 	    break;
2312     }
2313     /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2314     deleted_lines_mark(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, n);
2315 
2316     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
2317     check_cursor_lnum();
2318 }
2319 
2320     int
2321 gchar_pos(pos)
2322     pos_T *pos;
2323 {
2324     char_u	*ptr = ml_get_pos(pos);
2325 
2326 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2327     if (has_mbyte)
2328 	return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr);
2329 #endif
2330     return (int)*ptr;
2331 }
2332 
2333     int
2334 gchar_cursor()
2335 {
2336 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2337     if (has_mbyte)
2338 	return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor());
2339 #endif
2340     return (int)*ml_get_cursor();
2341 }
2342 
2343 /*
2344  * Write a character at the current cursor position.
2345  * It is directly written into the block.
2346  */
2347     void
2348 pchar_cursor(c)
2349     int c;
2350 {
2351     *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE)
2352 						  + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c;
2353 }
2354 
2355 #if 0 /* not used */
2356 /*
2357  * Put *pos at end of current buffer
2358  */
2359     void
2360 goto_endofbuf(pos)
2361     pos_T    *pos;
2362 {
2363     char_u  *p;
2364 
2365     pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count;
2366     pos->col = 0;
2367     p = ml_get(pos->lnum);
2368     while (*p++)
2369 	++pos->col;
2370 }
2371 #endif
2372 
2373 /*
2374  * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first
2375  *		    non-blank in the line.
2376  * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in
2377  *		    the line.
2378  */
2379     int
2380 inindent(extra)
2381     int	    extra;
2382 {
2383     char_u	*ptr;
2384     colnr_T	col;
2385 
2386     for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col)
2387 	++ptr;
2388     if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra)
2389 	return TRUE;
2390     else
2391 	return FALSE;
2392 }
2393 
2394 /*
2395  * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma.
2396  */
2397     char_u *
2398 skip_to_option_part(p)
2399     char_u  *p;
2400 {
2401     if (*p == ',')
2402 	++p;
2403     while (*p == ' ')
2404 	++p;
2405     return p;
2406 }
2407 
2408 /*
2409  * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed.
2410  *
2411  * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also
2412  * mark the area of the display to be redrawn.
2413  */
2414     void
2415 changed()
2416 {
2417 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK)
2418     /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't
2419      * mean a change of the buffer yet.  That is delayed until the
2420      * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */
2421     if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting)
2422 	return;
2423     xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE;
2424 #endif
2425 
2426     if (!curbuf->b_changed)
2427     {
2428 	int	save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll;
2429 
2430 	change_warning(0);
2431 	/* Create a swap file if that is wanted.
2432 	 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */
2433 	if (curbuf->b_may_swap
2434 #ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX
2435 		&& !bt_dontwrite(curbuf)
2436 #endif
2437 		)
2438 	{
2439 	    ml_open_file(curbuf);
2440 
2441 	    /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message.
2442 	     * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected
2443 	     * message.  Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now,
2444 	     * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */
2445 	    if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0)
2446 	    {
2447 		out_flush();
2448 		ui_delay(2000L, TRUE);
2449 		wait_return(TRUE);
2450 		msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll;
2451 	    }
2452 	}
2453 	curbuf->b_changed = TRUE;
2454 	ml_setdirty(curbuf, TRUE);
2455 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2456 	check_status(curbuf);
2457 #endif
2458 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2459 	need_maketitle = TRUE;	    /* set window title later */
2460 #endif
2461     }
2462     ++curbuf->b_changedtick;
2463     ++global_changedtick;
2464 }
2465 
2466 static void changedOneline __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
2467 static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2468 
2469 /*
2470  * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer.
2471  * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2472  * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed()
2473  * - invalidates cached values
2474  */
2475     void
2476 changed_bytes(lnum, col)
2477     linenr_T	lnum;
2478     colnr_T	col;
2479 {
2480     changedOneline(lnum);
2481     changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L);
2482 }
2483 
2484     static void
2485 changedOneline(lnum)
2486     linenr_T	lnum;
2487 {
2488     if (curbuf->b_mod_set)
2489     {
2490 	/* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
2491 	if (lnum < curbuf->b_mod_top)
2492 	    curbuf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2493 	else if (lnum >= curbuf->b_mod_bot)
2494 	    curbuf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2495     }
2496     else
2497     {
2498 	/* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */
2499 	curbuf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2500 	curbuf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2501 	curbuf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2502 	curbuf->b_mod_xlines = 0;
2503     }
2504 }
2505 
2506 /*
2507  * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2508  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2509  * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2510  */
2511     void
2512 appended_lines(lnum, count)
2513     linenr_T	lnum;
2514     long	count;
2515 {
2516     changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2517 }
2518 
2519 /*
2520  * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2521  */
2522     void
2523 appended_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2524     linenr_T	lnum;
2525     long	count;
2526 {
2527     mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L);
2528     changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2529 }
2530 
2531 /*
2532  * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2533  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2534  * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2535  */
2536     void
2537 deleted_lines(lnum, count)
2538     linenr_T	lnum;
2539     long	count;
2540 {
2541     changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2542 }
2543 
2544 /*
2545  * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2546  */
2547     void
2548 deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2549     linenr_T	lnum;
2550     long	count;
2551 {
2552     mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count);
2553     changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2554 }
2555 
2556 /*
2557  * Changed lines for the current buffer.
2558  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2559  * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed()
2560  * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2561  * - invalidate cached values
2562  * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line
2563  * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change).
2564  * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal.
2565  * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*.
2566  */
2567     void
2568 changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2569     linenr_T	lnum;	    /* first line with change */
2570     colnr_T	col;	    /* column in first line with change */
2571     linenr_T	lnume;	    /* line below last changed line */
2572     long	xtra;	    /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2573 {
2574     if (curbuf->b_mod_set)
2575     {
2576 	/* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
2577 	if (lnum < curbuf->b_mod_top)
2578 	    curbuf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2579 	if (lnum < curbuf->b_mod_bot)
2580 	{
2581 	    /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */
2582 	    curbuf->b_mod_bot += xtra;
2583 	    if (curbuf->b_mod_bot < lnum)
2584 		curbuf->b_mod_bot = lnum;
2585 	}
2586 	if (lnume + xtra > curbuf->b_mod_bot)
2587 	    curbuf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2588 	curbuf->b_mod_xlines += xtra;
2589     }
2590     else
2591     {
2592 	/* set the area that must be redisplayed */
2593 	curbuf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2594 	curbuf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2595 	curbuf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2596 	curbuf->b_mod_xlines = xtra;
2597     }
2598 
2599     changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra);
2600 }
2601 
2602     static void
2603 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2604     linenr_T	lnum;
2605     colnr_T	col;
2606     linenr_T	lnume;
2607     long	xtra;
2608 {
2609     win_T	*wp;
2610     int		i;
2611 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2612     int		cols;
2613     pos_T	*p;
2614     int		add;
2615 #endif
2616 
2617     /* mark the buffer as modified */
2618     changed();
2619 
2620     /* set the '. mark */
2621     if (!cmdmod.keepjumps)
2622     {
2623 	curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum;
2624 	curbuf->b_last_change.col = col;
2625 
2626 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2627 	/* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we
2628 	 * don't have an entry yet. */
2629 	if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2630 	{
2631 	    if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2632 		add = TRUE;
2633 	    else
2634 	    {
2635 		/* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same
2636 		 * as the last one and the column is not too far away.  Avoids
2637 		 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */
2638 		p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1];
2639 		if (p->lnum != lnum)
2640 		    add = TRUE;
2641 		else
2642 		{
2643 		    cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE);
2644 		    if (cols == 0)
2645 			cols = 79;
2646 		    add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col);
2647 		}
2648 	    }
2649 	    if (add)
2650 	    {
2651 		/* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes
2652 		 * and it's at some distance of the last change.  Use a new
2653 		 * position in the changelist. */
2654 		curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE;
2655 
2656 		if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE)
2657 		{
2658 		    /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */
2659 		    curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1;
2660 		    mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1,
2661 					  sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1));
2662 		    FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2663 		    {
2664 			/* Correct position in changelist for other windows on
2665 			 * this buffer. */
2666 			if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0)
2667 			    --wp->w_changelistidx;
2668 		    }
2669 		}
2670 		FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2671 		{
2672 		    /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is
2673 		     * at the end it stays at the end. */
2674 		    if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf
2675 			    && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen)
2676 			++wp->w_changelistidx;
2677 		}
2678 		++curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2679 	    }
2680 	}
2681 	curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] =
2682 							curbuf->b_last_change;
2683 	/* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g,"
2684 	 * takes you back to it. */
2685 	curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2686 #endif
2687     }
2688 
2689     FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2690     {
2691 	if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf)
2692 	{
2693 	    /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */
2694 	    if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID)
2695 		wp->w_redr_type = VALID;
2696 
2697 	    /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached
2698 	     * values for the cursor. */
2699 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2700 	    /*
2701 	     * Update the folds for this window.  Can't postpone this, because
2702 	     * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd".
2703 	     */
2704 	    foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1);
2705 
2706 	    /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become
2707 	     * included in a fold.  Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that
2708 	     * might be displayed differently.
2709 	     * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when
2710 	     * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */
2711 	    i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL);
2712 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum)
2713 		wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2714 	    i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL);
2715 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume)
2716 		wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2717 
2718 	    /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines,
2719 	     * compare with the first line in that range. */
2720 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum)
2721 	    {
2722 		i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum);
2723 		if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum)
2724 		    changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2725 	    }
2726 #endif
2727 
2728 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum)
2729 		changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2730 	    else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col)
2731 		changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp);
2732 	    if (wp->w_botline >= lnum)
2733 	    {
2734 		/* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make
2735 		 * other lines scroll down below botline). */
2736 		approximate_botline_win(wp);
2737 	    }
2738 
2739 	    /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid.
2740 	     * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for
2741 	     * inserted/deleted lines.  Makes it possible to stop displaying
2742 	     * after the change. */
2743 	    for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i)
2744 		if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid)
2745 		{
2746 		    if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum)
2747 		    {
2748 			if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume)
2749 			{
2750 			    /* line included in change */
2751 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2752 			}
2753 			else if (xtra != 0)
2754 			{
2755 			    /* line below change */
2756 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra;
2757 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2758 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra;
2759 #endif
2760 			}
2761 		    }
2762 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2763 		    else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum)
2764 		    {
2765 			/* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines,
2766 			 * may need to be redrawn */
2767 			wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2768 		    }
2769 #endif
2770 		}
2771 	}
2772     }
2773 
2774     /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn,
2775      * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */
2776     if (must_redraw < VALID)
2777 	must_redraw = VALID;
2778 }
2779 
2780 /*
2781  * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf'
2782  */
2783     void
2784 unchanged(buf, ff)
2785     buf_T	*buf;
2786     int		ff;	/* also reset 'fileformat' */
2787 {
2788     if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf)))
2789     {
2790 	buf->b_changed = 0;
2791 	ml_setdirty(buf, FALSE);
2792 	if (ff)
2793 	    save_file_ff(buf);
2794 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2795 	check_status(buf);
2796 #endif
2797 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2798 	need_maketitle = TRUE;	    /* set window title later */
2799 #endif
2800     }
2801     ++buf->b_changedtick;
2802     ++global_changedtick;
2803 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2804     netbeans_unmodified(buf);
2805 #endif
2806 }
2807 
2808 #if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO)
2809 /*
2810  * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf'
2811  *		 need to be updated
2812  */
2813     void
2814 check_status(buf)
2815     buf_T	*buf;
2816 {
2817     win_T	*wp;
2818 
2819     for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2820 	if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height)
2821 	{
2822 	    wp->w_redr_status = TRUE;
2823 	    if (must_redraw < VALID)
2824 		must_redraw = VALID;
2825 	}
2826 }
2827 #endif
2828 
2829 /*
2830  * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change.
2831  * Don't do this for autocommands.
2832  * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer.
2833  * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but b_did_warn
2834  * will be TRUE.
2835  */
2836     void
2837 change_warning(col)
2838     int	    col;		/* column for message; non-zero when in insert
2839 				   mode and 'showmode' is on */
2840 {
2841     if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE
2842 	    && curbufIsChanged() == 0
2843 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2844 	    && !autocmd_busy
2845 #endif
2846 	    && curbuf->b_p_ro)
2847     {
2848 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2849 	apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf);
2850 	if (!curbuf->b_p_ro)
2851 	    return;
2852 #endif
2853 	/*
2854 	 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should
2855 	 * be after the mode message.
2856 	 */
2857 	msg_start();
2858 	if (msg_row == Rows - 1)
2859 	    msg_col = col;
2860 	msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
2861 	MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"),
2862 						   hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST);
2863 	msg_clr_eos();
2864 	(void)msg_end();
2865 	if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode)
2866 	{
2867 	    out_flush();
2868 	    ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */
2869 	}
2870 	curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE;
2871 	redraw_cmdline = FALSE;	/* don't redraw and erase the message */
2872 	if (msg_row < Rows - 1)
2873 	    showmode();
2874     }
2875 }
2876 
2877 /*
2878  * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'.
2879  * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid
2880  * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit.
2881  * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters
2882  * from any buffers but directly from the user.
2883  *
2884  * return the 'y' or 'n'
2885  */
2886     int
2887 ask_yesno(str, direct)
2888     char_u  *str;
2889     int	    direct;
2890 {
2891     int	    r = ' ';
2892     int	    save_State = State;
2893 
2894     if (exiting)		/* put terminal in raw mode for this question */
2895 	settmode(TMODE_RAW);
2896     ++no_wait_return;
2897 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
2898     dont_scroll = TRUE;		/* disallow scrolling here */
2899 #endif
2900     State = CONFIRM;		/* mouse behaves like with :confirm */
2901 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2902     setmouse();			/* disables mouse for xterm */
2903 #endif
2904     ++no_mapping;
2905     ++allow_keys;		/* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
2906 
2907     while (r != 'y' && r != 'n')
2908     {
2909 	/* same highlighting as for wait_return */
2910 	smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str);
2911 	if (direct)
2912 	    r = get_keystroke();
2913 	else
2914 	    r = safe_vgetc();
2915 	if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC)
2916 	    r = 'n';
2917 	msg_putchar(r);	    /* show what you typed */
2918 	out_flush();
2919     }
2920     --no_wait_return;
2921     State = save_State;
2922 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2923     setmouse();
2924 #endif
2925     --no_mapping;
2926     --allow_keys;
2927 
2928     return r;
2929 }
2930 
2931 /*
2932  * Get a key stroke directly from the user.
2933  * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left
2934  * button (used at the more prompt).
2935  * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters.
2936  * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored.
2937  * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC.
2938  */
2939     int
2940 get_keystroke()
2941 {
2942 #define CBUFLEN 151
2943     char_u	buf[CBUFLEN];
2944     int		len = 0;
2945     int		n;
2946     int		save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c;
2947 
2948     mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE;	/* mappings are not used here */
2949     for (;;)
2950     {
2951 	cursor_on();
2952 	out_flush();
2953 
2954 	/* First time: blocking wait.  Second time: wait up to 100ms for a
2955 	 * terminal code to complete.  Leave some room for check_termcode() to
2956 	 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL).  And
2957 	 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */
2958 	n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3,
2959 						    len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0);
2960 	if (n > 0)
2961 	{
2962 	    /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */
2963 	    n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE);
2964 	    len += n;
2965 	}
2966 
2967 	/* incomplete termcode: get more characters */
2968 	if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0)
2969 	    continue;
2970 	/* found a termcode: adjust length */
2971 	if (n > 0)
2972 	    len = n;
2973 	if (len == 0)	    /* nothing typed yet */
2974 	    continue;
2975 
2976 	/* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */
2977 	n = buf[0];
2978 	if (n == K_SPECIAL)
2979 	{
2980 	    n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]);
2981 	    if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER
2982 		    || n == K_IGNORE
2983 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2984 		    || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM
2985 		    || n == K_LEFTDRAG
2986 		    || n == K_LEFTRELEASE
2987 		    || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM
2988 		    || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE
2989 		    || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG
2990 		    || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE
2991 		    || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE
2992 		    || n == K_RIGHTDRAG
2993 		    || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE
2994 		    || n == K_MOUSEDOWN
2995 		    || n == K_MOUSEUP
2996 		    || n == K_X1MOUSE
2997 		    || n == K_X1DRAG
2998 		    || n == K_X1RELEASE
2999 		    || n == K_X2MOUSE
3000 		    || n == K_X2DRAG
3001 		    || n == K_X2RELEASE
3002 # ifdef FEAT_GUI
3003 		    || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR
3004 		    || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR
3005 # endif
3006 #endif
3007 	       )
3008 	    {
3009 		if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER)
3010 		    mod_mask = buf[2];
3011 		len -= 3;
3012 		if (len > 0)
3013 		    mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len);
3014 		continue;
3015 	    }
3016 	}
3017 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
3018 	if (has_mbyte)
3019 	{
3020 	    if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len)
3021 		continue;	/* more bytes to get */
3022 	    buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL;
3023 	    n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf);
3024 	}
3025 #endif
3026 #ifdef UNIX
3027 	if (n == intr_char)
3028 	    n = ESC;
3029 #endif
3030 	break;
3031     }
3032 
3033     mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c;
3034     return n;
3035 }
3036 
3037 /*
3038  * get a number from the user
3039  */
3040     int
3041 get_number(colon)
3042     int	colon;			/* allow colon to abort */
3043 {
3044     int	n = 0;
3045     int	c;
3046 
3047     /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a
3048      * zero (as if CR was hit). */
3049     if (msg_silent != 0)
3050 	return 0;
3051 
3052 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
3053     dont_scroll = TRUE;		/* disallow scrolling here */
3054 #endif
3055     ++no_mapping;
3056     ++allow_keys;		/* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
3057     for (;;)
3058     {
3059 	windgoto(msg_row, msg_col);
3060 	c = safe_vgetc();
3061 	if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c))
3062 	{
3063 	    n = n * 10 + c - '0';
3064 	    msg_putchar(c);
3065 	}
3066 	else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H)
3067 	{
3068 	    n /= 10;
3069 	    MSG_PUTS("\b \b");
3070 	}
3071 	else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon)
3072 	{
3073 	    stuffcharReadbuff(':');
3074 	    if (!exmode_active)
3075 		cmdline_row = msg_row;
3076 	    skip_redraw = TRUE;	    /* skip redraw once */
3077 	    do_redraw = FALSE;
3078 	    break;
3079 	}
3080 	else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC)
3081 	    break;
3082     }
3083     --no_mapping;
3084     --allow_keys;
3085     return n;
3086 }
3087 
3088     void
3089 msgmore(n)
3090     long n;
3091 {
3092     long pn;
3093 
3094     if (global_busy	    /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */
3095 	    || keep_msg != NULL /* there is a message already, skip this one */
3096 	    || !messaging())  /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */
3097 	return;
3098 
3099     if (n > 0)
3100 	pn = n;
3101     else
3102 	pn = -n;
3103 
3104     if (pn > p_report)
3105     {
3106 	if (pn == 1)
3107 	{
3108 	    if (n > 0)
3109 		STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line"));
3110 	    else
3111 		STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less"));
3112 	}
3113 	else
3114 	{
3115 	    if (n > 0)
3116 		sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn);
3117 	    else
3118 		sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn);
3119 	}
3120 	if (got_int)
3121 	    STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)"));
3122 	if (msg(msg_buf))
3123 	{
3124 	    set_keep_msg(msg_buf);
3125 	    keep_msg_attr = 0;
3126 	}
3127     }
3128 }
3129 
3130 /*
3131  * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error
3132  */
3133     void
3134 beep_flush()
3135 {
3136     if (emsg_silent == 0)
3137     {
3138 	flush_buffers(FALSE);
3139 	vim_beep();
3140     }
3141 }
3142 
3143 /*
3144  * give a warning for an error
3145  */
3146     void
3147 vim_beep()
3148 {
3149     if (emsg_silent == 0)
3150     {
3151 	if (p_vb
3152 #ifdef FEAT_GUI
3153 		/* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI
3154 		 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */
3155 		&& !(gui.in_use && gui.starting)
3156 #endif
3157 		)
3158 	{
3159 	    out_str(T_VB);
3160 	}
3161 	else
3162 	{
3163 #ifdef MSDOS
3164 	    /*
3165 	     * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait
3166 	     * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems
3167 	     * where the beeps don't overlap.
3168 	     */
3169 	    if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10)
3170 	    {
3171 		out_char(BELL);
3172 		beep_count = 1;
3173 	    }
3174 	    else
3175 		++beep_count;
3176 #else
3177 	    out_char(BELL);
3178 #endif
3179 	}
3180     }
3181 }
3182 
3183 /*
3184  * To get the "real" home directory:
3185  * - get value of $HOME
3186  * For Unix:
3187  *  - go to that directory
3188  *  - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory.
3189  *  This also works with mounts and links.
3190  *  Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive.
3191  */
3192 static char_u	*homedir = NULL;
3193 
3194     void
3195 init_homedir()
3196 {
3197     char_u  *var;
3198 
3199 #ifdef VMS
3200     var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3201 #else
3202     var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3203 #endif
3204 
3205     if (var != NULL && *var == NUL)	/* empty is same as not set */
3206 	var = NULL;
3207 
3208 #ifdef WIN3264
3209     /*
3210      * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another
3211      * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%".  Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set
3212      * when $HOME is being set.
3213      */
3214     if (var != NULL && *var == '%')
3215     {
3216 	char_u	*p;
3217 	char_u	*exp;
3218 
3219 	p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%');
3220 	if (p != NULL)
3221 	{
3222 	    STRNCPY(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1));
3223 	    NameBuff[p - (var + 1)] = NUL;
3224 	    exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff);
3225 	    if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL
3226 					&& STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL)
3227 	    {
3228 		sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", exp, p + 1);
3229 		var = NameBuff;
3230 		/* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3231 		vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3232 	    }
3233 	}
3234     }
3235 
3236     /*
3237      * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has
3238      * specifically defined it for Vim's sake.  However, on Windows NT
3239      * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for
3240      * each user.  Try constructing $HOME from these.
3241      */
3242     if (var == NULL)
3243     {
3244 	char_u *homedrive, *homepath;
3245 
3246 	homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE");
3247 	homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH");
3248 	if (homedrive != NULL && homepath != NULL
3249 			   && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL)
3250 	{
3251 	    sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath);
3252 	    if (NameBuff[0] != NUL)
3253 	    {
3254 		var = NameBuff;
3255 		/* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3256 		vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3257 	    }
3258 	}
3259     }
3260 #endif
3261 
3262 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3263     /*
3264      * Default home dir is C:/
3265      * Best assumption we can make in such a situation.
3266      */
3267     if (var == NULL)
3268 	var = "C:/";
3269 #endif
3270     if (var != NULL)
3271     {
3272 #ifdef UNIX
3273 	/*
3274 	 * Change to the directory and get the actual path.  This resolves
3275 	 * links.  Don't do it when we can't return.
3276 	 */
3277 	if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK
3278 					  && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0)
3279 	{
3280 	    if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK)
3281 		var = IObuff;
3282 	    if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0)
3283 		EMSG(_(e_prev_dir));
3284 	}
3285 #endif
3286 	homedir = vim_strsave(var);
3287     }
3288 }
3289 
3290 /*
3291  * Expand environment variable with path name.
3292  * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME.	For Unix "~user/" is expanded.
3293  * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$".
3294  * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src.
3295  */
3296     void
3297 expand_env(src, dst, dstlen)
3298     char_u	*src;		/* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3299     char_u	*dst;		/* where to put the result */
3300     int		dstlen;		/* maximum length of the result */
3301 {
3302     expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE);
3303 }
3304 
3305     void
3306 expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, esc)
3307     char_u	*src;		/* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3308     char_u	*dst;		/* where to put the result */
3309     int		dstlen;		/* maximum length of the result */
3310     int		esc;		/* escape spaces in expanded variables */
3311 {
3312     char_u	*tail;
3313     int		c;
3314     char_u	*var;
3315     int		copy_char;
3316     int		mustfree;	/* var was allocated, need to free it later */
3317     int		at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */
3318 
3319     src = skipwhite(src);
3320     --dstlen;		    /* leave one char space for "\," */
3321     while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3322     {
3323 	copy_char = TRUE;
3324 	if ((*src == '$'
3325 #ifdef VMS
3326 		    && at_start
3327 #endif
3328 	   )
3329 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3330 		|| *src == '%'
3331 #endif
3332 		|| (*src == '~' && at_start))
3333 	{
3334 	    mustfree = FALSE;
3335 
3336 	    /*
3337 	     * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may
3338 	     * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended.
3339 	     */
3340 	    if (*src != '~')				/* environment var */
3341 	    {
3342 		tail = src + 1;
3343 		var = dst;
3344 		c = dstlen - 1;
3345 
3346 #ifdef UNIX
3347 		/* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */
3348 		if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{'))
3349 		{
3350 		    tail++;	/* ignore '{' */
3351 		    while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}')
3352 			*var++ = *tail++;
3353 		}
3354 		else
3355 #endif
3356 		{
3357 		    while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail))
3358 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3359 			    || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3360 #endif
3361 			    ))
3362 		    {
3363 #ifdef OS2		/* env vars only in uppercase */
3364 			*var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail);
3365 			tail++;	    /* toupper() may be a macro! */
3366 #else
3367 			*var++ = *tail++;
3368 #endif
3369 		    }
3370 		}
3371 
3372 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3373 # ifdef UNIX
3374 		if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}')
3375 # else
3376 		if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3377 # endif
3378 		    var = NULL;
3379 		else
3380 		{
3381 # ifdef UNIX
3382 		    if (src[1] == '{')
3383 # else
3384 		    if (*src == '%')
3385 #endif
3386 			++tail;
3387 #endif
3388 		    *var = NUL;
3389 		    var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree);
3390 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3391 		}
3392 #endif
3393 	    }
3394 							/* home directory */
3395 	    else if (  src[1] == NUL
3396 		    || vim_ispathsep(src[1])
3397 		    || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL)
3398 	    {
3399 		var = homedir;
3400 		tail = src + 1;
3401 	    }
3402 	    else					/* user directory */
3403 	    {
3404 #if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME))
3405 		/*
3406 		 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it.
3407 		 */
3408 		tail = src;
3409 		var = dst;
3410 		c = dstlen - 1;
3411 		while (	   c-- > 0
3412 			&& *tail
3413 			&& vim_isfilec(*tail)
3414 			&& !vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3415 		    *var++ = *tail++;
3416 		*var = NUL;
3417 # ifdef UNIX
3418 		/*
3419 		 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it.
3420 		 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to
3421 		 * expand ~user.  This is slower and may fail if the shell
3422 		 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh).
3423 		 */
3424 #  if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H)
3425 		{
3426 		    struct passwd *pw;
3427 
3428 		    pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1);
3429 		    if (pw != NULL)
3430 			var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir;
3431 		    else
3432 			var = NULL;
3433 		}
3434 		if (var == NULL)
3435 #  endif
3436 		{
3437 		    expand_T	xpc;
3438 
3439 		    ExpandInit(&xpc);
3440 		    xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES;
3441 		    var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL,
3442 				WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE);
3443 		    ExpandCleanup(&xpc);
3444 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3445 		}
3446 
3447 # else	/* !UNIX, thus VMS */
3448 		/*
3449 		 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of
3450 		 * directories to search for the user account in.
3451 		 */
3452 		{
3453 		    char_u	test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL];
3454 		    char_u	*path, *next_path, *ptr;
3455 		    struct stat	st;
3456 
3457 		    STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME);
3458 		    next_path = paths;
3459 		    while (*next_path)
3460 		    {
3461 			for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ',';
3462 				next_path++);
3463 			if (*next_path)
3464 			    *next_path++ = NUL;
3465 			STRCPY(test, path);
3466 			STRCAT(test, "/");
3467 			STRCAT(test, dst + 1);
3468 			if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0)
3469 			{
3470 			    var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1);
3471 			    STRCPY(var, test);
3472 			    mustfree = TRUE;
3473 			    break;
3474 			}
3475 		    }
3476 		}
3477 # endif /* UNIX */
3478 #else
3479 		/* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */
3480 		var = NULL;
3481 		tail = (char_u *)"";	/* for gcc */
3482 #endif /* UNIX || VMS */
3483 	    }
3484 
3485 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
3486 	    /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes.
3487 	     * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */
3488 	    if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL)
3489 	    {
3490 		char_u	*p = vim_strsave(var);
3491 
3492 		if (p != NULL)
3493 		{
3494 		    if (mustfree)
3495 			vim_free(var);
3496 		    var = p;
3497 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3498 		    forward_slash(var);
3499 		}
3500 	    }
3501 #endif
3502 
3503 	    /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash.
3504 	     * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */
3505 	    if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL)
3506 	    {
3507 		char_u	*p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t");
3508 
3509 		if (p != NULL)
3510 		{
3511 		    if (mustfree)
3512 			vim_free(var);
3513 		    var = p;
3514 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3515 		}
3516 	    }
3517 
3518 	    if (var != NULL && *var != NUL
3519 		    && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen))
3520 	    {
3521 		STRCPY(dst, var);
3522 		dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var);
3523 		dst += STRLEN(var);
3524 		/* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts
3525 		 * with it, skip a character */
3526 		if (*var != NUL && vim_ispathsep(dst[-1])
3527 #if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA)
3528 			&& dst[-1] != ':'
3529 #endif
3530 			&& vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3531 		    ++tail;
3532 		src = tail;
3533 		copy_char = FALSE;
3534 	    }
3535 	    if (mustfree)
3536 		vim_free(var);
3537 	}
3538 
3539 	if (copy_char)	    /* copy at least one char */
3540 	{
3541 	    /*
3542 	     * Recogize the start of a new name, for '~'.
3543 	     */
3544 	    at_start = FALSE;
3545 	    if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL)
3546 	    {
3547 		*dst++ = *src++;
3548 		--dstlen;
3549 	    }
3550 	    else if (src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',')
3551 		at_start = TRUE;
3552 	    *dst++ = *src++;
3553 	    --dstlen;
3554 	}
3555     }
3556     *dst = NUL;
3557 }
3558 
3559 /*
3560  * Vim's version of getenv().
3561  * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME.
3562  */
3563     char_u *
3564 vim_getenv(name, mustfree)
3565     char_u	*name;
3566     int		*mustfree;	/* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */
3567 {
3568     char_u	*p;
3569     char_u	*pend;
3570     int		vimruntime;
3571 
3572 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3573     /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */
3574     if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0)
3575 	return homedir;
3576 #endif
3577 
3578     p = mch_getenv(name);
3579     if (p != NULL && *p == NUL)	    /* empty is the same as not set */
3580 	p = NULL;
3581 
3582     if (p != NULL)
3583 	return p;
3584 
3585     vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0);
3586     if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0)
3587 	return NULL;
3588 
3589     /*
3590      * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM.
3591      * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty.
3592      */
3593     if (vimruntime
3594 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3595 	    && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL
3596 #endif
3597        )
3598     {
3599 	p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3600 	if (p != NULL && *p == NUL)	    /* empty is the same as not set */
3601 	    p = NULL;
3602 	if (p != NULL)
3603 	{
3604 	    p = vim_version_dir(p);
3605 	    if (p != NULL)
3606 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3607 	    else
3608 		p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3609 	}
3610     }
3611 
3612     /*
3613      * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using:
3614      * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$')
3615      * - the executable name from argv[0]
3616      */
3617     if (p == NULL)
3618     {
3619 	if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL)
3620 	    p = p_hf;
3621 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3622 	/*
3623 	 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0].
3624 	 */
3625 	else
3626 	    p = exe_name;
3627 #endif
3628 	if (p != NULL)
3629 	{
3630 	    /* remove the file name */
3631 	    pend = gettail(p);
3632 
3633 	    /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */
3634 	    if (p == p_hf)
3635 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc");
3636 
3637 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3638 # ifdef MACOS_X
3639 	    /* remove "build/..." from exe_name, if present */
3640 	    if (p == exe_name)
3641 	    {
3642 		char_u	*pend1;
3643 		char_u  *pend2;
3644 
3645 		pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"Contents/MacOS");
3646 		pend2 = remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend1, (char_u *)".app");
3647 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend2, (char_u *)"build");
3648 		/* When runnig from project builder get rid of the
3649 		 * build/???.app, otherwise keep the ???.app */
3650 		if (pend2 == pend)
3651 		    pend = pend1;
3652 	    }
3653 # endif
3654 	    /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */
3655 	    if (p == exe_name)
3656 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src");
3657 #endif
3658 
3659 	    /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */
3660 	    if (!vimruntime)
3661 	    {
3662 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME);
3663 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT);
3664 	    }
3665 
3666 	    /* remove trailing path separator */
3667 #ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC
3668 	    /* With MacOS path (with  colons) the final colon is required */
3669 	    /* to avoid confusion between absoulute and relative path */
3670 	    if (pend > p && vim_ispathsep(*(pend - 1)))
3671 		--pend;
3672 #endif
3673 
3674 	    /* check that the result is a directory name */
3675 	    p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p));
3676 
3677 	    if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p))
3678 	    {
3679 		vim_free(p);
3680 		p = NULL;
3681 	    }
3682 	    else
3683 	    {
3684 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3685 		/* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */
3686 		if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL)
3687 		{
3688 		    vim_free(p);
3689 		    p = pend;
3690 		}
3691 #endif
3692 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3693 	    }
3694 	}
3695     }
3696 
3697 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3698     /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and
3699      * default_vimruntime_dir */
3700     if (p == NULL)
3701     {
3702 	/* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */
3703 	if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL)
3704 	{
3705 	    p = default_vimruntime_dir;
3706 	    *mustfree = FALSE;
3707 	}
3708 	else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL)
3709 	{
3710 	    if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL)
3711 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3712 	    else
3713 	    {
3714 		p = default_vim_dir;
3715 		*mustfree = FALSE;
3716 	    }
3717 	}
3718     }
3719 #endif
3720 
3721     /*
3722      * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast
3723      * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl).
3724      */
3725     if (p != NULL)
3726     {
3727 	if (vimruntime)
3728 	{
3729 	    vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p);
3730 	    didset_vimruntime = TRUE;
3731 #ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT
3732 	    {
3733 		char_u	*buf = alloc((unsigned int)STRLEN(p) + 6);
3734 
3735 		if (buf != NULL)
3736 		{
3737 		    STRCPY(buf, p);
3738 		    STRCAT(buf, "/lang");
3739 		    bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf);
3740 		    vim_free(buf);
3741 		}
3742 	    }
3743 #endif
3744 	}
3745 	else
3746 	{
3747 	    vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p);
3748 	    didset_vim = TRUE;
3749 	}
3750     }
3751     return p;
3752 }
3753 
3754 /*
3755  * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists.
3756  * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise.
3757  */
3758     static char_u *
3759 vim_version_dir(vimdir)
3760     char_u	*vimdir;
3761 {
3762     char_u	*p;
3763 
3764     if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL)
3765 	return NULL;
3766     p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE);
3767     if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3768 	return p;
3769     vim_free(p);
3770     p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE);
3771     if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3772 	return p;
3773     vim_free(p);
3774     return NULL;
3775 }
3776 
3777 /*
3778  * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus
3779  * the length of "name/".  Otherwise return "pend".
3780  */
3781     static char_u *
3782 remove_tail(p, pend, name)
3783     char_u	*p;
3784     char_u	*pend;
3785     char_u	*name;
3786 {
3787     int		len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1;
3788     char_u	*newend = pend - len;
3789 
3790     if (newend >= p
3791 	    && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0
3792 	    && (newend == p || vim_ispathsep(*(newend - 1))))
3793 	return newend;
3794     return pend;
3795 }
3796 
3797 #if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
3798 /*
3799  * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "???.ext/", return "pend"
3800  * minus the length of "???.ext/".  Otherwise return "pend".
3801  */
3802     static char_u *
3803 remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend, ext)
3804     char_u	*p;
3805     char_u	*pend;
3806     char_u	*ext;
3807 {
3808     int		len = (int)STRLEN(ext) + 1;
3809     char_u	*newend = pend - len;
3810 
3811     if (newend >= p && fnamencmp(newend, ext, len - 1) == 0)
3812 	while (newend != p && !vim_ispathsep(*(newend - 1)))
3813 	    --newend;
3814     if (newend == p || vim_ispathsep(*(newend - 1)))
3815 	return newend;
3816     return pend;
3817 }
3818 #endif
3819 
3820 /*
3821  * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string.
3822  * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed
3823  * again soon.
3824  */
3825     char_u *
3826 expand_env_save(src)
3827     char_u	*src;
3828 {
3829     char_u	*p;
3830 
3831     p = alloc(MAXPATHL);
3832     if (p != NULL)
3833 	expand_env(src, p, MAXPATHL);
3834     return p;
3835 }
3836 
3837 /*
3838  * Our portable version of setenv.
3839  */
3840     void
3841 vim_setenv(name, val)
3842     char_u	*name;
3843     char_u	*val;
3844 {
3845 #ifdef HAVE_SETENV
3846     mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1);
3847 #else
3848     char_u	*envbuf;
3849 
3850     /*
3851      * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain
3852      * valid.  The allocated memory will never be freed.
3853      */
3854     envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2));
3855     if (envbuf != NULL)
3856     {
3857 	sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val);
3858 	putenv((char *)envbuf);
3859     }
3860 #endif
3861 }
3862 
3863 #if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
3864 /*
3865  * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name.
3866  */
3867 /*ARGSUSED*/
3868     char_u *
3869 get_env_name(xp, idx)
3870     expand_T	*xp;
3871     int		idx;
3872 {
3873 # if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__)
3874     /*
3875      * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW).
3876      */
3877     return NULL;
3878 # else
3879 # ifndef __WIN32__
3880     /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */
3881     extern char		**environ;
3882 # endif
3883 # define ENVNAMELEN 100
3884     static char_u	name[ENVNAMELEN];
3885     char_u		*str;
3886     int			n;
3887 
3888     str = (char_u *)environ[idx];
3889     if (str == NULL)
3890 	return NULL;
3891 
3892     for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n)
3893     {
3894 	if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL)
3895 	    break;
3896 	name[n] = str[n];
3897     }
3898     name[n] = NUL;
3899     return name;
3900 # endif
3901 }
3902 #endif
3903 
3904 /*
3905  * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in
3906  * 'src'.
3907  * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src.
3908  */
3909     void
3910 home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one)
3911     buf_T	*buf;	/* when not NULL, check for help files */
3912     char_u	*src;	/* input file name */
3913     char_u	*dst;	/* where to put the result */
3914     int		dstlen;	/* maximum length of the result */
3915     int		one;	/* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include
3916 			   spaces and commas in the file name. */
3917 {
3918     size_t	dirlen = 0, envlen = 0;
3919     size_t	len;
3920     char_u	*homedir_env;
3921     char_u	*p;
3922 
3923     if (src == NULL)
3924     {
3925 	*dst = NUL;
3926 	return;
3927     }
3928 
3929     /*
3930      * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely.
3931      */
3932     if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help)
3933     {
3934 	STRCPY(dst, gettail(src));
3935 	return;
3936     }
3937 
3938     /*
3939      * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the
3940      * "real" home directory.
3941      */
3942     if (homedir != NULL)
3943 	dirlen = STRLEN(homedir);
3944 
3945 #ifdef VMS
3946     homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3947 #else
3948     homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3949 #endif
3950 
3951     if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL)
3952 	homedir_env = NULL;
3953     if (homedir_env != NULL)
3954 	envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env);
3955 
3956     if (!one)
3957 	src = skipwhite(src);
3958     while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3959     {
3960 	/*
3961 	 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name.
3962 	 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches
3963 	 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/'
3964 	 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla",
3965 	 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up
3966 	 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user
3967 	 * er's home directory)).
3968 	 */
3969 	p = homedir;
3970 	len = dirlen;
3971 	for (;;)
3972 	{
3973 	    if (   len
3974 		&& fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0
3975 		&& (vim_ispathsep(src[len])
3976 		    || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' '))
3977 		    || src[len] == NUL))
3978 	    {
3979 		src += len;
3980 		if (--dstlen > 0)
3981 		    *dst++ = '~';
3982 
3983 		/*
3984 		 * If it's just the home directory, add  "/".
3985 		 */
3986 		if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0)
3987 		    *dst++ = '/';
3988 		break;
3989 	    }
3990 	    if (p == homedir_env)
3991 		break;
3992 	    p = homedir_env;
3993 	    len = envlen;
3994 	}
3995 
3996 	/* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */
3997 	while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0)
3998 	    *dst++ = *src++;
3999 	/* skip separator */
4000 	while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0)
4001 	    *dst++ = *src++;
4002     }
4003     /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */
4004 
4005     *dst = NUL;
4006 }
4007 
4008 /*
4009  * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory.
4010  * When something fails, NULL is returned.
4011  */
4012     char_u  *
4013 home_replace_save(buf, src)
4014     buf_T	*buf;	/* when not NULL, check for help files */
4015     char_u	*src;	/* input file name */
4016 {
4017     char_u	*dst;
4018     unsigned	len;
4019 
4020     len = 3;			/* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */
4021     if (src != NULL)		/* just in case */
4022 	len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src);
4023     dst = alloc(len);
4024     if (dst != NULL)
4025 	home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE);
4026     return dst;
4027 }
4028 
4029 /*
4030  * Compare two file names and return:
4031  * FPC_SAME   if they both exist and are the same file.
4032  * FPC_SAMEX  if they both don't exist and have the same file name.
4033  * FPC_DIFF   if they both exist and are different files.
4034  * FPC_NOTX   if they both don't exist.
4035  * FPC_DIFFX  if one of them doesn't exist.
4036  * For the first name environment variables are expanded
4037  */
4038     int
4039 fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname)
4040     char_u *s1, *s2;
4041     int	    checkname;		/* when both don't exist, check file names */
4042 {
4043 #ifdef UNIX
4044     char_u	    exp1[MAXPATHL];
4045     char_u	    full1[MAXPATHL];
4046     char_u	    full2[MAXPATHL];
4047     struct stat	    st1, st2;
4048     int		    r1, r2;
4049 
4050     expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4051     r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1);
4052     r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2);
4053     if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0)
4054     {
4055 	/* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */
4056 	if (checkname)
4057 	{
4058 	    if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4059 		return FPC_SAMEX;
4060 	    r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4061 	    r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4062 	    if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0)
4063 		return FPC_SAMEX;
4064 	}
4065 	return FPC_NOTX;
4066     }
4067     if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0)
4068 	return FPC_DIFFX;
4069     if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino)
4070 	return FPC_SAME;
4071     return FPC_DIFF;
4072 #else
4073     char_u  *exp1;		/* expanded s1 */
4074     char_u  *full1;		/* full path of s1 */
4075     char_u  *full2;		/* full path of s2 */
4076     int	    retval = FPC_DIFF;
4077     int	    r1, r2;
4078 
4079     /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */
4080     if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL)
4081     {
4082 	full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL;
4083 	full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL;
4084 
4085 	expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4086 	r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4087 	r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4088 
4089 	/* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */
4090 	if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK)
4091 	{
4092 	    if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4093 		retval = FPC_SAMEX;
4094 	    else
4095 		retval = FPC_NOTX;
4096 	}
4097 	else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK)
4098 	    retval = FPC_DIFFX;
4099 	else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2))
4100 	    retval = FPC_DIFF;
4101 	else
4102 	    retval = FPC_SAME;
4103 	vim_free(exp1);
4104     }
4105     return retval;
4106 #endif
4107 }
4108 
4109 /*
4110  * Get the tail of a path: the file name.
4111  * Fail safe: never returns NULL.
4112  */
4113     char_u *
4114 gettail(fname)
4115     char_u *fname;
4116 {
4117     char_u  *p1, *p2;
4118 
4119     if (fname == NULL)
4120 	return (char_u *)"";
4121     for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; )	/* find last part of path */
4122     {
4123 	if (vim_ispathsep(*p2))
4124 	    p1 = p2 + 1;
4125 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
4126 	if (has_mbyte)
4127 	    p2 += (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p2);
4128 	else
4129 #endif
4130 	    ++p2;
4131     }
4132     return p1;
4133 }
4134 
4135 /*
4136  * get the next path component (just after the next path separator).
4137  */
4138     char_u *
4139 getnextcomp(fname)
4140     char_u *fname;
4141 {
4142     while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname))
4143 	++fname;
4144     if (*fname)
4145 	++fname;
4146     return fname;
4147 }
4148 
4149 #if defined(FEAT_MODIFY_FNAME) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) \
4150 	|| defined(FEAT_SESSION) || defined(MSWIN) \
4151 	|| ((defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) || defined(FEAT_GUI_KDE)) \
4152 			    && (defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(FEAT_DND))) \
4153 	|| defined(FEAT_SUN_WORKSHOP) || defined(FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG) \
4154 	|| defined(PROTO)
4155 /*
4156  * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name.
4157  * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head.
4158  * If there is no head, path is returned.
4159  */
4160     char_u *
4161 get_past_head(path)
4162     char_u  *path;
4163 {
4164     char_u  *retval;
4165 
4166 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
4167     /* may skip "c:" */
4168     if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':')
4169 	retval = path + 2;
4170     else
4171 	retval = path;
4172 #else
4173 # if defined(AMIGA)
4174     /* may skip "label:" */
4175     retval = vim_strchr(path, ':');
4176     if (retval == NULL)
4177 	retval = path;
4178 # else	/* Unix */
4179     retval = path;
4180 # endif
4181 #endif
4182 
4183     while (vim_ispathsep(*retval))
4184 	++retval;
4185 
4186     return retval;
4187 }
4188 #endif
4189 
4190 /*
4191  * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator.
4192  */
4193     int
4194 vim_ispathsep(c)
4195     int c;
4196 {
4197 #ifdef RISCOS
4198     return (c == '.' || c == ':');
4199 #else
4200 # ifdef UNIX
4201     return (c == '/');	    /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */
4202 # else
4203 #  ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
4204     return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\');
4205 #  else
4206 #   ifdef VMS
4207     /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */
4208     return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/'
4209 	    || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' );
4210 #   else
4211 #    ifdef COLON_AS_PATHSEP
4212     return (c == ':');
4213 #    else		/* Amiga */
4214     return (c == ':' || c == '/');
4215 #    endif
4216 #   endif /* VMS */
4217 #  endif
4218 # endif
4219 #endif /* RISC OS */
4220 }
4221 
4222 #if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO)
4223 /*
4224  * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator.
4225  */
4226     int
4227 vim_ispathlistsep(c)
4228     int c;
4229 {
4230 #ifdef UNIX
4231     return (c == ':');
4232 #else
4233     return (c == ';');	/* might not be rigth for every system... */
4234 #endif
4235 }
4236 #endif
4237 
4238 #if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \
4239 	|| defined(PROTO)
4240 /*
4241  * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally.
4242  */
4243     int
4244 vim_fnamecmp(x, y)
4245     char_u	*x, *y;
4246 {
4247     return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL);
4248 }
4249 
4250     int
4251 vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len)
4252     char_u	*x, *y;
4253     size_t	len;
4254 {
4255     while (len > 0 && *x && *y)
4256     {
4257 	if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y)
4258 		&& !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\')
4259 		&& !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/'))
4260 	    break;
4261 	++x;
4262 	++y;
4263 	--len;
4264     }
4265     if (len == 0)
4266 	return 0;
4267     return (*x - *y);
4268 }
4269 #endif
4270 
4271 /*
4272  * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory.
4273  * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is neccesary.
4274  */
4275     char_u  *
4276 concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep)
4277     char_u  *fname1;
4278     char_u  *fname2;
4279     int	    sep;
4280 {
4281     char_u  *dest;
4282 
4283     dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3));
4284     if (dest != NULL)
4285     {
4286 	STRCPY(dest, fname1);
4287 	if (sep)
4288 	    add_pathsep(dest);
4289 	STRCAT(dest, fname2);
4290     }
4291     return dest;
4292 }
4293 
4294 /*
4295  * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path
4296  * separator.
4297  */
4298     void
4299 add_pathsep(p)
4300     char_u	*p;
4301 {
4302     if (*p != NUL && !vim_ispathsep(*(p + STRLEN(p) - 1)))
4303 	STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR);
4304 }
4305 
4306 /*
4307  * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name.
4308  * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4309  */
4310     char_u  *
4311 FullName_save(fname, force)
4312     char_u	*fname;
4313     int		force;	    /* force expansion, even when it already looks
4314 			       like a full path name */
4315 {
4316     char_u	*buf;
4317     char_u	*new_fname = NULL;
4318 
4319     if (fname == NULL)
4320 	return NULL;
4321 
4322     buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL);
4323     if (buf != NULL)
4324     {
4325 	if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL)
4326 	    new_fname = vim_strsave(buf);
4327 	else
4328 	    new_fname = vim_strsave(fname);
4329 	vim_free(buf);
4330     }
4331     return new_fname;
4332 }
4333 
4334 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL)
4335 
4336 static char_u	*skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p));
4337 
4338 /*
4339  * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now.
4340  * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards.
4341  */
4342     pos_T *
4343 find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
4344     int		ind_maxcomment;
4345 {
4346     pos_T	*pos;
4347     char_u	*line;
4348     char_u	*p;
4349 
4350     if ((pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, ind_maxcomment)) == NULL)
4351 	return NULL;
4352 
4353     /*
4354      * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string.
4355      */
4356     line = ml_get(pos->lnum);
4357     for (p = line; *p && (unsigned)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p)
4358 	p = skip_string(p);
4359     if ((unsigned)(p - line) > pos->col)
4360 	return NULL;
4361     return pos;
4362 }
4363 
4364 /*
4365  * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character.
4366  * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified.
4367  */
4368     static char_u *
4369 skip_string(p)
4370     char_u  *p;
4371 {
4372     int	    i;
4373 
4374     /*
4375      * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time".
4376      */
4377     for ( ; ; ++p)
4378     {
4379 	if (p[0] == '\'')		    /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */
4380 	{
4381 	    if (!p[1])			    /* ' at end of line */
4382 		break;
4383 	    i = 2;
4384 	    if (p[1] == '\\')		    /* '\n' or '\000' */
4385 	    {
4386 		++i;
4387 		while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1]))   /* '\000' */
4388 		    ++i;
4389 	    }
4390 	    if (p[i] == '\'')		    /* check for trailing ' */
4391 	    {
4392 		p += i;
4393 		continue;
4394 	    }
4395 	}
4396 	else if (p[0] == '"')		    /* start of string */
4397 	{
4398 	    for (++p; p[0]; ++p)
4399 	    {
4400 		if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL)
4401 		    ++p;
4402 		else if (p[0] == '"')	    /* end of string */
4403 		    break;
4404 	    }
4405 	    if (p[0] == '"')
4406 		continue;
4407 	}
4408 	break;				    /* no string found */
4409     }
4410     if (!*p)
4411 	--p;				    /* backup from NUL */
4412     return p;
4413 }
4414 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */
4415 
4416 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO)
4417 
4418 /*
4419  * Do C or expression indenting on the current line.
4420  */
4421     void
4422 do_c_expr_indent()
4423 {
4424 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL
4425     if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL)
4426 	fixthisline(get_expr_indent);
4427     else
4428 # endif
4429 	fixthisline(get_c_indent);
4430 }
4431 
4432 /*
4433  * Functions for C-indenting.
4434  * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer.
4435  */
4436 /*
4437  * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line.
4438  */
4439 
4440 static char_u	*cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4441 static int	cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *));
4442 static pos_T	*find_line_comment __ARGS((void));
4443 static int	cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **));
4444 static int	cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *));
4445 static char_u	*after_label __ARGS((char_u *l));
4446 static int	get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4447 static int	skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment));
4448 static int	cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void));
4449 static int	cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4450 static int	cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *));
4451 static int	cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump));
4452 static int	cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4453 static int	cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4454 static int	cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int));
4455 static int	cin_isinit __ARGS((void));
4456 static int	cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T));
4457 static int	cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *));
4458 static int	cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *));
4459 static int	cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *));
4460 static int	cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int));
4461 static int	cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *));
4462 static int	cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((char_u *line, colnr_T *col));
4463 static int	cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *));
4464 static int	cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos));
4465 static pos_T	*find_start_brace __ARGS((int));
4466 static pos_T	*find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int));
4467 static int	corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos));
4468 static int	find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end));
4469 static int	find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4470 
4471 /*
4472  * Skip over white space and C comments within the line.
4473  */
4474     static char_u *
4475 cin_skipcomment(s)
4476     char_u	*s;
4477 {
4478     while (*s)
4479     {
4480 	s = skipwhite(s);
4481 	if (*s != '/')
4482 	    break;
4483 	++s;
4484 	if (*s == '/')		/* slash-slash comment continues till eol */
4485 	{
4486 	    s += STRLEN(s);
4487 	    break;
4488 	}
4489 	if (*s != '*')
4490 	    break;
4491 	for (++s; *s; ++s)	/* skip slash-star comment */
4492 	    if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/')
4493 	    {
4494 		s += 2;
4495 		break;
4496 	    }
4497     }
4498     return s;
4499 }
4500 
4501 /*
4502  * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s.  White space and comments are
4503  * not considered code.
4504  */
4505     static int
4506 cin_nocode(s)
4507     char_u	*s;
4508 {
4509     return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL;
4510 }
4511 
4512 /*
4513  * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines.
4514  */
4515     static pos_T *
4516 find_line_comment() /* XXX */
4517 {
4518     static pos_T pos;
4519     char_u	 *line;
4520     char_u	 *p;
4521 
4522     pos = curwin->w_cursor;
4523     while (--pos.lnum > 0)
4524     {
4525 	line = ml_get(pos.lnum);
4526 	p = skipwhite(line);
4527 	if (cin_islinecomment(p))
4528 	{
4529 	    pos.col = (int)(p - line);
4530 	    return &pos;
4531 	}
4532 	if (*p != NUL)
4533 	    break;
4534     }
4535     return NULL;
4536 }
4537 
4538 /*
4539  * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true.
4540  */
4541     static int
4542 cin_islabel_skip(s)
4543     char_u	**s;
4544 {
4545     if (!vim_isIDc(**s))	    /* need at least one ID character */
4546 	return FALSE;
4547 
4548     while (vim_isIDc(**s))
4549 	(*s)++;
4550 
4551     *s = cin_skipcomment(*s);
4552 
4553     /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */
4554     return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':');
4555 }
4556 
4557 /*
4558  * Recognize a label: "label:".
4559  * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label.
4560  */
4561     int
4562 cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)		/* XXX */
4563     int		ind_maxcomment;
4564 {
4565     char_u	*s;
4566 
4567     s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4568 
4569     /*
4570      * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented
4571      * like a switch label.  Same for C++ scope declarations.
4572      */
4573     if (cin_isdefault(s))
4574 	return FALSE;
4575     if (cin_isscopedecl(s))
4576 	return FALSE;
4577 
4578     if (cin_islabel_skip(&s))
4579     {
4580 	/*
4581 	 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case
4582 	 * label.
4583 	 */
4584 	pos_T	cursor_save;
4585 	pos_T	*trypos;
4586 	char_u	*line;
4587 
4588 	cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4589 	while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
4590 	{
4591 	    --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
4592 
4593 	    /*
4594 	     * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
4595 	     */
4596 	    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
4597 	    if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
4598 		curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
4599 
4600 	    line = ml_get_curline();
4601 	    if (cin_ispreproc(line))	/* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
4602 		continue;
4603 	    if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL)
4604 		continue;
4605 
4606 	    curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4607 	    if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE)
4608 		    || cin_isscopedecl(line)
4609 		    || cin_iscase(line)
4610 		    || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line)))
4611 		return TRUE;
4612 	    return FALSE;
4613 	}
4614 	curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4615 	return TRUE;		/* label at start of file??? */
4616     }
4617     return FALSE;
4618 }
4619 
4620 /*
4621  * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations.
4622  * Q&D-Implementation:
4623  * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line.
4624  */
4625     static int
4626 cin_isinit(void)
4627 {
4628     char_u	*s;
4629 
4630     s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4631 
4632     if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7]))
4633 	s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7);
4634 
4635     if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4636 	return TRUE;
4637 
4638     if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{"))
4639 	return TRUE;
4640 
4641     return FALSE;
4642 }
4643 
4644 /*
4645  * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:".
4646  */
4647      int
4648 cin_iscase(s)
4649     char_u *s;
4650 {
4651     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4652     if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4653     {
4654 	for (s += 4; *s; ++s)
4655 	{
4656 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4657 	    if (*s == ':')
4658 	    {
4659 		if (s[1] == ':')	/* skip over "::" for C++ */
4660 		    ++s;
4661 		else
4662 		    return TRUE;
4663 	    }
4664 	    if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'')
4665 		s += 2;			/* skip over '.' */
4666 	    else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/'))
4667 		return FALSE;		/* stop at comment */
4668 	    else if (*s == '"')
4669 		return FALSE;		/* stop at string */
4670 	}
4671 	return FALSE;
4672     }
4673 
4674     if (cin_isdefault(s))
4675 	return TRUE;
4676     return FALSE;
4677 }
4678 
4679 /*
4680  * Recognize a "default" switch label.
4681  */
4682     static int
4683 cin_isdefault(s)
4684     char_u  *s;
4685 {
4686     return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0
4687 	    && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':'
4688 	    && s[1] != ':');
4689 }
4690 
4691 /*
4692  * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label.
4693  */
4694     int
4695 cin_isscopedecl(s)
4696     char_u	*s;
4697 {
4698     int		i;
4699 
4700     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4701     if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0)
4702 	i = 6;
4703     else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0)
4704 	i = 9;
4705     else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0)
4706 	i = 7;
4707     else
4708 	return FALSE;
4709     return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':');
4710 }
4711 
4712 /*
4713  * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'.
4714  * Return NULL if not found.
4715  *	  case 234:    a = b;
4716  *		       ^
4717  */
4718     static char_u *
4719 after_label(l)
4720     char_u  *l;
4721 {
4722     for ( ; *l; ++l)
4723     {
4724 	if (*l == ':')
4725 	{
4726 	    if (l[1] == ':')	    /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4727 		++l;
4728 	    else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1))
4729 		break;
4730 	}
4731 	else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'')
4732 	    l += 2;		    /* skip over 'x' */
4733     }
4734     if (*l == NUL)
4735 	return NULL;
4736     l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1);
4737     if (*l == NUL)
4738 	return NULL;
4739     return l;
4740 }
4741 
4742 /*
4743  * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label.
4744  * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label.
4745  */
4746     static int
4747 get_indent_nolabel(lnum)		/* XXX */
4748     linenr_T	lnum;
4749 {
4750     char_u	*l;
4751     pos_T	fp;
4752     colnr_T	col;
4753     char_u	*p;
4754 
4755     l = ml_get(lnum);
4756     p = after_label(l);
4757     if (p == NULL)
4758 	return 0;
4759 
4760     fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l);
4761     fp.lnum = lnum;
4762     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
4763     return (int)col;
4764 }
4765 
4766 /*
4767  * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label.
4768  * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label).
4769  *   label:	if (asdf && asdfasdf)
4770  *		^
4771  */
4772     static int
4773 skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment)
4774     linenr_T	lnum;
4775     char_u	**pp;
4776     int		ind_maxcomment;
4777 {
4778     char_u	*l;
4779     int		amount;
4780     pos_T	cursor_save;
4781 
4782     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4783     curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
4784     l = ml_get_curline();
4785 				    /* XXX */
4786     if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
4787     {
4788 	amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum);
4789 	l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
4790 	if (l == NULL)		/* just in case */
4791 	    l = ml_get_curline();
4792     }
4793     else
4794     {
4795 	amount = get_indent();
4796 	l = ml_get_curline();
4797     }
4798     *pp = l;
4799 
4800     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4801     return amount;
4802 }
4803 
4804 /*
4805  * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration.
4806  *  int	    a,			indent of "a"
4807  *  static struct foo    b,	indent of "b"
4808  *  enum bla    c,		indent of "c"
4809  * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration.
4810  */
4811     static int
4812 cin_first_id_amount()
4813 {
4814     char_u	*line, *p, *s;
4815     int		len;
4816     pos_T	fp;
4817     colnr_T	col;
4818 
4819     line = ml_get_curline();
4820     p = skipwhite(line);
4821     len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
4822     if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0)
4823     {
4824 	p = skipwhite(p + 6);
4825 	len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
4826     }
4827     if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0)
4828 	p = skipwhite(p + 6);
4829     else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0)
4830 	p = skipwhite(p + 4);
4831     else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0)
4832 	    || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0))
4833     {
4834 	s = skipwhite(p + len);
4835 	if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3]))
4836 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))
4837 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5]))
4838 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])))
4839 	    p = s;
4840     }
4841     for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len)
4842 	;
4843     if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p))
4844 	return 0;
4845 
4846     p = skipwhite(p + len);
4847     fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
4848     fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
4849     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
4850     return (int)col;
4851 }
4852 
4853 /*
4854  * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign.
4855  *       char *foo = "here";
4856  * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found.
4857  * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash.
4858  *      foo = "asdf\
4859  *	       asdf\
4860  *	       here";
4861  */
4862     static int
4863 cin_get_equal_amount(lnum)
4864     linenr_T	lnum;
4865 {
4866     char_u	*line;
4867     char_u	*s;
4868     colnr_T	col;
4869     pos_T	fp;
4870 
4871     if (lnum > 1)
4872     {
4873 	line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
4874 	if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\')
4875 	    return -1;
4876     }
4877 
4878     line = s = ml_get(lnum);
4879     while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL)
4880     {
4881 	if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
4882 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4883 	else
4884 	    ++s;
4885     }
4886     if (*s != '=')
4887 	return 0;
4888 
4889     s = skipwhite(s + 1);
4890     if (cin_nocode(s))
4891 	return 0;
4892 
4893     if (*s == '"')	/* nice alignment for continued strings */
4894 	++s;
4895 
4896     fp.lnum = lnum;
4897     fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
4898     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
4899     return (int)col;
4900 }
4901 
4902 /*
4903  * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'.
4904  */
4905     static int
4906 cin_ispreproc(s)
4907     char_u *s;
4908 {
4909     s = skipwhite(s);
4910     if (*s == '#')
4911 	return TRUE;
4912     return FALSE;
4913 }
4914 
4915 /*
4916  * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a
4917  * continuation line of a preprocessor statement.  Decrease "*lnump" to the
4918  * start and return the line in "*pp".
4919  */
4920     static int
4921 cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump)
4922     char_u	**pp;
4923     linenr_T	*lnump;
4924 {
4925     char_u	*line = *pp;
4926     linenr_T	lnum = *lnump;
4927     int		retval = FALSE;
4928 
4929     while (1)
4930     {
4931 	if (cin_ispreproc(line))
4932 	{
4933 	    retval = TRUE;
4934 	    *lnump = lnum;
4935 	    break;
4936 	}
4937 	if (lnum == 1)
4938 	    break;
4939 	line = ml_get(--lnum);
4940 	if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\')
4941 	    break;
4942     }
4943 
4944     if (lnum != *lnump)
4945 	*pp = ml_get(*lnump);
4946     return retval;
4947 }
4948 
4949 /*
4950  * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment.
4951  */
4952     static int
4953 cin_iscomment(p)
4954     char_u  *p;
4955 {
4956     return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/'));
4957 }
4958 
4959 /*
4960  * Recognize the start of a "//" comment.
4961  */
4962     static int
4963 cin_islinecomment(p)
4964     char_u *p;
4965 {
4966     return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/');
4967 }
4968 
4969 /*
4970  * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'.
4971  * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line.
4972  * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if
4973  * both apply in order to determine initializations).
4974  */
4975     static int
4976 cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma)
4977     char_u	*s;
4978     int		incl_open;	/* include '{' at the end as terminator */
4979     int		incl_comma;	/* recognize a trailing comma */
4980 {
4981     char_u found_start = 0;
4982 
4983     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4984 
4985     if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s)))
4986 	found_start = *s;
4987 
4988     while (*s)
4989     {
4990 	/* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */
4991 	s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s));
4992 	if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}'
4993 						 || (incl_comma && *s == ','))
4994 		&& cin_nocode(s + 1))
4995 	    return *s;
4996 
4997 	if (*s)
4998 	    s++;
4999     }
5000     return found_start;
5001 }
5002 
5003 /*
5004  * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to
5005  * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and
5006  * no semicolons anywhere.
5007  * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line.
5008  * "sp" points to a string with the line.  When looking at other lines it must
5009  * be restored to the line.  When it's NULL fetch lines here.
5010  * "lnum" is where we start looking.
5011  */
5012     static int
5013 cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum)
5014     char_u	**sp;
5015     linenr_T	first_lnum;
5016 {
5017     char_u	*s;
5018     linenr_T	lnum = first_lnum;
5019     int		retval = FALSE;
5020 
5021     if (sp == NULL)
5022 	s = ml_get(lnum);
5023     else
5024 	s = *sp;
5025 
5026     while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5027     {
5028 	if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5029 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5030 	else
5031 	    ++s;
5032     }
5033     if (*s != '(')
5034 	return FALSE;		/* ';', ' or "  before any () or no '(' */
5035 
5036     while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5037     {
5038 	if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5039 	{
5040 	    /* ')' at the end: may have found a match
5041 	     * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash:
5042 	     *       #if defined(x) && \
5043 	     *		 defined(y)
5044 	     */
5045 	    lnum = first_lnum - 1;
5046 	    s = ml_get(lnum);
5047 	    if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\')
5048 		retval = TRUE;
5049 	    goto done;
5050 	}
5051 	if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5052 	{
5053 	    /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */
5054 	    if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
5055 		break;
5056 
5057 	    s = ml_get(++lnum);
5058 	}
5059 	else if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5060 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5061 	else
5062 	    ++s;
5063     }
5064 
5065 done:
5066     if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL)
5067 	*sp = ml_get(first_lnum);
5068 
5069     return retval;
5070 }
5071 
5072     static int
5073 cin_isif(p)
5074     char_u  *p;
5075 {
5076     return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5077 }
5078 
5079     static int
5080 cin_iselse(p)
5081     char_u  *p;
5082 {
5083     if (*p == '}')	    /* accept "} else" */
5084 	p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5085     return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4]));
5086 }
5087 
5088     static int
5089 cin_isdo(p)
5090     char_u  *p;
5091 {
5092     return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5093 }
5094 
5095 /*
5096  * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do".
5097  * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the
5098  * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines.
5099  */
5100     static int
5101 cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen)	    /* XXX */
5102     char_u	*p;
5103     linenr_T	lnum;
5104     int		ind_maxparen;
5105 {
5106     pos_T	cursor_save;
5107     pos_T	*trypos;
5108     int		retval = FALSE;
5109 
5110     p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5111     if (*p == '}')		/* accept "} while (cond);" */
5112 	p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5113     if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]))
5114     {
5115 	cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5116 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5117 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5118 	p = ml_get_curline();
5119 	while (*p && *p != 'w')	/* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */
5120 	{
5121 	    ++p;
5122 	    ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
5123 	}
5124 	if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL
5125 		&& *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';')
5126 	    retval = TRUE;
5127 	curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5128     }
5129     return retval;
5130 }
5131 
5132     static int
5133 cin_isbreak(p)
5134     char_u  *p;
5135 {
5136     return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]));
5137 }
5138 
5139 /* Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or
5140  * constructor-initialization. eg:
5141  *
5142  * class MyClass :
5143  *	baseClass		<-- here
5144  * class MyClass : public baseClass,
5145  *	anotherBaseClass	<-- here (should probably lineup ??)
5146  * MyClass::MyClass(...) :
5147  *	baseClass(...)		<-- here (constructor-initialization)
5148  */
5149     static int
5150 cin_is_cpp_baseclass(line, col)
5151     char_u	*line;
5152     colnr_T	*col;
5153 {
5154     char_u	*s;
5155     int		class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class;
5156 
5157     *col = 0;
5158 
5159     s = skipwhite(line);
5160     if (*s == '#')		/* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */
5161 	return FALSE;
5162     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5163     if (*s == NUL)
5164 	return FALSE;
5165 
5166     cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5167 
5168     while(*s != NUL)
5169     {
5170 	if (s[0] == ':')
5171 	{
5172 	    if (s[1] == ':')
5173 	    {
5174 		/* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor
5175 		 * initialization any more */
5176 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5177 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2);
5178 	    }
5179 	    else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct)
5180 	    {
5181 		/* we have something found, that looks like the start of
5182 		 * cpp-base-class-declaration or contructor-initialization */
5183 		cpp_base_class = TRUE;
5184 		lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5185 		*col = 0;
5186 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5187 	    }
5188 	    else
5189 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5190 	}
5191 	else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5192 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6])))
5193 	{
5194 	    class_or_struct = TRUE;
5195 	    lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5196 
5197 	    if (*s == 'c')
5198 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5);
5199 	    else
5200 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6);
5201 	}
5202 	else
5203 	{
5204 	    if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';')
5205 	    {
5206 		cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5207 	    }
5208 	    else if (s[0] == ')')
5209 	    {
5210 		/* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across
5211 		 * something like "):" */
5212 		class_or_struct = FALSE;
5213 		lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE;
5214 	    }
5215 	    else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0]))
5216 	    {
5217 		/* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */
5218 		class_or_struct = FALSE;
5219 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5220 	    }
5221 	    else if (*col == 0)
5222 	    {
5223 		/* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */
5224 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5225 
5226 		/* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */
5227 		if (cpp_base_class && *col == 0)
5228 		    *col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5229 	    }
5230 
5231 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5232 	}
5233     }
5234 
5235     return cpp_base_class;
5236 }
5237 
5238 /*
5239  * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by
5240  * white space and comments.  Skip strings and comments.
5241  * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL.
5242  */
5243     static int
5244 cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore)
5245     char_u	*s;
5246     char_u	*find;
5247     char_u	*ignore;
5248 {
5249     char_u	*p = s;
5250     char_u	*r;
5251     int		len = (int)STRLEN(find);
5252 
5253     while (*p != NUL)
5254     {
5255 	p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5256 	if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0)
5257 	{
5258 	    r = skipwhite(p + len);
5259 	    if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0)
5260 		r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore));
5261 	    if (cin_nocode(r))
5262 		return TRUE;
5263 	}
5264 	if (*p != NUL)
5265 	    ++p;
5266     }
5267     return FALSE;
5268 }
5269 
5270 /*
5271  * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos".
5272  * Return the column found.
5273  */
5274     static int
5275 cin_skip2pos(trypos)
5276     pos_T	*trypos;
5277 {
5278     char_u	*line;
5279     char_u	*p;
5280 
5281     p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5282     while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col)
5283     {
5284 	if (cin_iscomment(p))
5285 	    p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5286 	else
5287 	{
5288 	    p = skip_string(p);
5289 	    ++p;
5290 	}
5291     }
5292     return (int)(p - line);
5293 }
5294 
5295 /*
5296  * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in.
5297  * Return NULL if no match found.
5298  * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines
5299  * work. */
5300 /* foo()    */
5301 /* {	    */
5302 /* }	    */
5303 
5304     static pos_T *
5305 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
5306     int		ind_maxcomment;
5307 {
5308     pos_T	cursor_save;
5309     pos_T	*trypos;
5310     pos_T	*pos;
5311     static pos_T	pos_copy;
5312 
5313     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5314     while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL)
5315     {
5316 	pos_copy = *trypos;	/* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */
5317 	trypos = &pos_copy;
5318 	curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5319 	pos = NULL;
5320 	/* ignore the { if it's in a // comment */
5321 	if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col
5322 		&& (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */
5323 	    break;
5324 	if (pos != NULL)
5325 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
5326     }
5327     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5328     return trypos;
5329 }
5330 
5331 /*
5332  * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment.
5333  * Return NULL of no match found.
5334  */
5335     static pos_T *
5336 find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
5337     int		ind_maxparen;
5338     int		ind_maxcomment;
5339 {
5340     pos_T	cursor_save;
5341     pos_T	*trypos;
5342     static pos_T	pos_copy;
5343 
5344     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5345     if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL)
5346     {
5347 	/* check if the ( is in a // comment */
5348 	if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col)
5349 	    trypos = NULL;
5350 	else
5351 	{
5352 	    pos_copy = *trypos;	    /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */
5353 	    trypos = &pos_copy;
5354 	    curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5355 	    if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */
5356 		trypos = NULL;
5357 	}
5358     }
5359     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5360     return trypos;
5361 }
5362 
5363 /*
5364  * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the
5365  * cursor position and "startpos".  This makes sure that searching for a
5366  * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of
5367  * looking a few lines further.
5368  */
5369     static int
5370 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos)
5371     int		ind_maxparen;
5372     pos_T	*startpos;
5373 {
5374     long	n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5375 
5376     if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2)
5377 	return ind_maxparen - (int)n;
5378     return ind_maxparen;
5379 }
5380 
5381 /*
5382  * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in
5383  * line "l".
5384  */
5385     static int
5386 find_last_paren(l, start, end)
5387     char_u	*l;
5388     int		start, end;
5389 {
5390     int		i;
5391     int		retval = FALSE;
5392     int		open_count = 0;
5393 
5394     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;		    /* default is start of line */
5395 
5396     for (i = 0; l[i]; i++)
5397     {
5398 	i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */
5399 	i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l);    /* ignore parens in quotes */
5400 	if (l[i] == start)
5401 	    ++open_count;
5402 	else if (l[i] == end)
5403 	{
5404 	    if (open_count > 0)
5405 		--open_count;
5406 	    else
5407 	    {
5408 		curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
5409 		retval = TRUE;
5410 	    }
5411 	}
5412     }
5413     return retval;
5414 }
5415 
5416     int
5417 get_c_indent()
5418 {
5419     /*
5420      * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that
5421      * block should be
5422      */
5423     int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5424 
5425     /*
5426      * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a
5427      * line is imagined to be.
5428      */
5429     int ind_open_imag = 0;
5430 
5431     /*
5432      * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by
5433      * an opening brace.
5434      */
5435     int ind_no_brace = 0;
5436 
5437     /*
5438      * column where the first { of a function should be located }
5439      */
5440     int ind_first_open = 0;
5441 
5442     /*
5443      * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be
5444      * located
5445      */
5446     int ind_open_extra = 0;
5447 
5448     /*
5449      * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left
5450      * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close
5451      * brace should be located
5452      */
5453     int ind_close_extra = 0;
5454 
5455     /*
5456      * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost
5457      * column is imagined to be
5458      */
5459     int ind_open_left_imag = 0;
5460 
5461     /*
5462      * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located
5463      */
5464     int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5465 
5466     /*
5467      * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located
5468      */
5469     int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5470 
5471     /*
5472      * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label
5473      */
5474     int ind_case_break = 0;
5475 
5476     /*
5477      * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label
5478      * should be located
5479      */
5480     int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5481 
5482     /*
5483      * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located
5484      */
5485     int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5486 
5487     /*
5488      * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented
5489      */
5490     int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5491 
5492     /*
5493      * amount a function type spec should be indented
5494      */
5495     int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5496 
5497     /*
5498      * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization
5499      * should be indented
5500      */
5501     int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5502 
5503     /*
5504      * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line
5505      * should be located
5506      */
5507     int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5508 
5509     /*
5510      * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses
5511      */
5512     int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2;
5513 
5514     /*
5515      * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which
5516      * itself is also unclosed
5517      */
5518     int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5519 
5520     /*
5521      * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an
5522      * unclosed parentheses.
5523      */
5524     int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0;
5525 
5526     /*
5527      * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and
5528      * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer
5529      * context (for very long lines).
5530      */
5531     int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0;
5532 
5533     /*
5534      * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after
5535      * an unclosed parentheses.
5536      */
5537     int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0;
5538 
5539     /*
5540      * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching
5541      * opening parentheses.
5542      */
5543     int ind_matching_paren = 0;
5544 
5545     /*
5546      * Extra indent for comments.
5547      */
5548     int ind_comment = 0;
5549 
5550     /*
5551      * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it.
5552      */
5553     int ind_in_comment = 3;
5554 
5555     /*
5556      * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something
5557      * after the comment opener.
5558      */
5559     int ind_in_comment2 = 0;
5560 
5561     /*
5562      * max lines to search for an open paren
5563      */
5564     int ind_maxparen = 20;
5565 
5566     /*
5567      * max lines to search for an open comment
5568      */
5569     int ind_maxcomment = 70;
5570 
5571     /*
5572      * handle braces for java code
5573      */
5574     int	ind_java = 0;
5575 
5576     /*
5577      * handle blocked cases correctly
5578      */
5579     int ind_keep_case_label = 0;
5580 
5581     pos_T	cur_curpos;
5582     int		amount;
5583     int		scope_amount;
5584     int		cur_amount;
5585     colnr_T	col;
5586     char_u	*theline;
5587     char_u	*linecopy;
5588     pos_T	*trypos;
5589     pos_T	*tryposBrace = NULL;
5590     pos_T	our_paren_pos;
5591     char_u	*start;
5592     int		start_brace;
5593 #define BRACE_IN_COL0		1	    /* '{' is in comumn 0 */
5594 #define BRACE_AT_START		2	    /* '{' is at start of line */
5595 #define BRACE_AT_END		3	    /* '{' is at end of line */
5596     linenr_T	ourscope;
5597     char_u	*l;
5598     char_u	*look;
5599     char_u	terminated;
5600     int		lookfor;
5601 #define LOOKFOR_INITIAL		0
5602 #define LOOKFOR_IF		1
5603 #define LOOKFOR_DO		2
5604 #define LOOKFOR_CASE		3
5605 #define LOOKFOR_ANY		4
5606 #define LOOKFOR_TERM		5
5607 #define LOOKFOR_UNTERM		6
5608 #define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL	7
5609 #define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK		8
5610 #define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS	9
5611 #define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT	10
5612 
5613     int		whilelevel;
5614     linenr_T	lnum;
5615     char_u	*options;
5616     int		fraction = 0;	    /* init for GCC */
5617     int		divider;
5618     int		n;
5619     int		iscase;
5620     int		lookfor_break;
5621     int		cont_amount = 0;    /* amount for continuation line */
5622 
5623     for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; )
5624     {
5625 	l = options++;
5626 	if (*options == '-')
5627 	    ++options;
5628 	n = getdigits(&options);
5629 	divider = 0;
5630 	if (*options == '.')	    /* ".5s" means a fraction */
5631 	{
5632 	    fraction = atol((char *)++options);
5633 	    while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options))
5634 	    {
5635 		++options;
5636 		if (divider)
5637 		    divider *= 10;
5638 		else
5639 		    divider = 10;
5640 	    }
5641 	}
5642 	if (*options == 's')	    /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */
5643 	{
5644 	    if (n == 0 && fraction == 0)
5645 		n = curbuf->b_p_sw;	/* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */
5646 	    else
5647 	    {
5648 		n *= curbuf->b_p_sw;
5649 		if (divider)
5650 		    n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider;
5651 	    }
5652 	    ++options;
5653 	}
5654 	if (l[1] == '-')
5655 	    n = -n;
5656 	/* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in
5657 	 * change.txt, and add explanation for it! */
5658 	switch (*l)
5659 	{
5660 	    case '>': ind_level = n; break;
5661 	    case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break;
5662 	    case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break;
5663 	    case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break;
5664 	    case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break;
5665 	    case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break;
5666 	    case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break;
5667 	    case ':': ind_case = n; break;
5668 	    case '=': ind_case_code = n; break;
5669 	    case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break;
5670 	    case 'p': ind_param = n; break;
5671 	    case 't': ind_func_type = n; break;
5672 	    case '/': ind_comment = n; break;
5673 	    case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break;
5674 	    case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break;
5675 	    case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break;
5676 	    case '+': ind_continuation = n; break;
5677 	    case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break;
5678 	    case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break;
5679 	    case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break;
5680 	    case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break;
5681 	    case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break;
5682 	    case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break;
5683 	    case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break;
5684 	    case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break;
5685 	    case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break;
5686 	    case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break;
5687 	    case 'j': ind_java = n; break;
5688 	    case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break;
5689 	}
5690     }
5691 
5692     /* remember where the cursor was when we started */
5693     cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor;
5694 
5695     /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line.
5696      * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with
5697      * ml_get is valid! */
5698     linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum));
5699     if (linecopy == NULL)
5700 	return 0;
5701 
5702     /*
5703      * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the
5704      * cursor position.  We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when
5705      * inserting new stuff.
5706      * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus
5707      * check for that.
5708      */
5709     if ((State & INSERT)
5710 	    && curwin->w_cursor.col < STRLEN(linecopy)
5711 	    && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')')
5712 	linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
5713 
5714     theline = skipwhite(linecopy);
5715 
5716     /* move the cursor to the start of the line */
5717 
5718     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5719 
5720     /*
5721      * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'.
5722      */
5723     if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE)))
5724     {
5725 	amount = 0;
5726     }
5727 
5728     /*
5729      * Is it a non-case label?	Then that goes at the left margin too.
5730      */
5731     else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))	    /* XXX */
5732     {
5733 	amount = 0;
5734     }
5735 
5736     /*
5737      * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a
5738      * previous line, lineup with that one.
5739      */
5740     else if (cin_islinecomment(theline)
5741 	    && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */
5742     {
5743 	/* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5744 	getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5745 	amount = col;
5746     }
5747 
5748     /*
5749      * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the
5750      * comment, try using the 'comments' option.
5751      */
5752     else if (!cin_iscomment(theline)
5753 	    && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
5754     {
5755 	int	lead_start_len = 2;
5756 	int	lead_middle_len = 1;
5757 	char_u	lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* start-comment string */
5758 	char_u	lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* middle-comment string */
5759 	char_u	lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN];		/* end-comment string */
5760 	char_u	*p;
5761 	int	start_align = 0;
5762 	int	start_off = 0;
5763 	int	done = FALSE;
5764 
5765 	/* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5766 	getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5767 	amount = col;
5768 
5769 	p = curbuf->b_p_com;
5770 	while (*p != NUL)
5771 	{
5772 	    int	align = 0;
5773 	    int	off = 0;
5774 	    int what = 0;
5775 
5776 	    while (*p != NUL && *p != ':')
5777 	    {
5778 		if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
5779 		    what = *p++;
5780 		else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT)
5781 		    align = *p++;
5782 		else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
5783 		    off = getdigits(&p);
5784 		else
5785 		    ++p;
5786 	    }
5787 
5788 	    if (*p == ':')
5789 		++p;
5790 	    (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
5791 	    if (what == COM_START)
5792 	    {
5793 		STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end);
5794 		lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start);
5795 		start_off = off;
5796 		start_align = align;
5797 	    }
5798 	    else if (what == COM_MIDDLE)
5799 	    {
5800 		STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end);
5801 		lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
5802 	    }
5803 	    else if (what == COM_END)
5804 	    {
5805 		/* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it
5806 		 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */
5807 		if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0
5808 			&& STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0)
5809 		{
5810 		    done = TRUE;
5811 		    if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
5812 		    {
5813 			/* If the start comment string matches in the previous
5814 			 * line, use the indent of that line pluss offset.  If
5815 			 * the middle comment string matches in the previous
5816 			 * line, use the indent of that line.  XXX */
5817 			look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1));
5818 			if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0)
5819 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
5820 			else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle,
5821 							lead_middle_len) == 0)
5822 			{
5823 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
5824 			    break;
5825 			}
5826 			/* If the start comment string doesn't match with the
5827 			 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */
5828 			else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col,
5829 					     lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0)
5830 			    continue;
5831 		    }
5832 		    if (start_off != 0)
5833 			amount += start_off;
5834 		    else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT)
5835 			amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
5836 						   - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
5837 		    break;
5838 		}
5839 
5840 		/* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up
5841 		 * with the middle comment */
5842 		if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0
5843 			&& STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0)
5844 		{
5845 		    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
5846 								     /* XXX */
5847 		    if (off != 0)
5848 			amount += off;
5849 		    else if (align == COM_RIGHT)
5850 			amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
5851 						   - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
5852 		    done = TRUE;
5853 		    break;
5854 		}
5855 	    }
5856 	}
5857 
5858 	/* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the
5859 	 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up
5860 	 * with the first character of the comment text.
5861 	 */
5862 	if (done)
5863 	    ;
5864 	else if (theline[0] == '*')
5865 	    amount += 1;
5866 	else
5867 	{
5868 	    /*
5869 	     * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take
5870 	     * the indent of the previous non-empty line.  If 'cino' has "CO"
5871 	     * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any
5872 	     * white characters after it line up with the text after it;
5873 	     * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino'
5874 	     */
5875 	    amount = -1;
5876 	    for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum)
5877 	    {
5878 		if (linewhite(lnum))		    /* skip blank lines */
5879 		    continue;
5880 		amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum);	    /* XXX */
5881 		break;
5882 	    }
5883 	    if (amount == -1)			    /* use the comment opener */
5884 	    {
5885 		if (!ind_in_comment2)
5886 		{
5887 		    start = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5888 		    look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */
5889 		    if (*look != NUL)		    /* if something after it */
5890 			trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start);
5891 		}
5892 		getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5893 		amount = col;
5894 		if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL)
5895 		    amount += ind_in_comment;
5896 	    }
5897 	}
5898     }
5899 
5900     /*
5901      * Are we inside parentheses or braces?
5902      */						    /* XXX */
5903     else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
5904 		&& ind_java == 0)
5905 	    || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
5906 	    || trypos != NULL)
5907     {
5908       if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL)
5909       {
5910 	  /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found.  Use the one which is
5911 	   * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */
5912 	  if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum
5913 		  ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum
5914 		  : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col)
5915 	      trypos = NULL;
5916 	  else
5917 	      tryposBrace = NULL;
5918       }
5919 
5920       if (trypos != NULL)
5921       {
5922 	/*
5923 	 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of
5924 	 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren.
5925 	 */
5926 	amount = -1;
5927 	cur_amount = MAXCOL;
5928 	our_paren_pos = *trypos;
5929 	for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum)
5930 	{
5931 	    l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum));
5932 	    if (cin_nocode(l))		/* skip comment lines */
5933 		continue;
5934 	    if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum))	/* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
5935 		continue;
5936 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5937 
5938 	    /* Skip a comment. XXX */
5939 	    if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
5940 	    {
5941 		lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
5942 		continue;
5943 	    }
5944 
5945 	    /* XXX */
5946 	    if ((trypos = find_match_paren(
5947 			    corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
5948 						      ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
5949 		    && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
5950 		    && trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col)
5951 	    {
5952 		    amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum);	/* XXX */
5953 
5954 		    if (theline[0] == ')')
5955 		    {
5956 			if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum && cur_amount > amount)
5957 			    cur_amount = amount;
5958 			amount = -1;
5959 		    }
5960 		break;
5961 	    }
5962 	}
5963 
5964 	/*
5965 	 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX
5966 	 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed
5967 	 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses.
5968 	 */
5969 	if (amount == -1)
5970 	{
5971 	    amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment);
5972 	    if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0
5973 		       || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
5974 	    {
5975 		/*
5976 		 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there;
5977 		 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character.
5978 		 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is
5979 		 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the
5980 		 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next
5981 		 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long
5982 		 * lines).
5983 		 */
5984 		if (theline[0] != ')')
5985 		{
5986 		    cur_amount = MAXCOL;
5987 		    l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum);
5988 		    if (ind_unclosed_wrapped
5989 				       && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL))
5990 		    {
5991 			/* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level
5992 			 * for each additional level */
5993 			n = 1;
5994 			for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col)
5995 			{
5996 			    switch (l[col])
5997 			    {
5998 				case '(':
5999 				case '{': ++n;
6000 					  break;
6001 
6002 				case ')':
6003 				case '}': if (n > 1)
6004 					      --n;
6005 					  break;
6006 			    }
6007 			}
6008 
6009 			our_paren_pos.col = 0;
6010 			amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped;
6011 		    }
6012 		    else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok)
6013 			our_paren_pos.col++;
6014 		    else
6015 		    {
6016 			col = our_paren_pos.col + 1;
6017 			while (vim_iswhite(l[col]))
6018 			    col++;
6019 			if (l[col] != NUL)	/* In case of trailing space */
6020 			    our_paren_pos.col = col;
6021 			else
6022 			    our_paren_pos.col++;
6023 		    }
6024 		}
6025 
6026 		/*
6027 		 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it
6028 		 * if we did the above "if".
6029 		 */
6030 		if (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6031 		{
6032 		    getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6033 		    if (cur_amount > (int)col)
6034 			cur_amount = col;
6035 		}
6036 	    }
6037 
6038 	    if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren)
6039 	    {
6040 		/* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
6041 	    }
6042 	    else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore
6043 						  && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6044 	    {
6045 		if (cur_amount != MAXCOL)
6046 		    amount = cur_amount;
6047 	    }
6048 	    else
6049 	    {
6050 		/* add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one */
6051 		col = our_paren_pos.col;
6052 		while (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6053 		{
6054 		    --our_paren_pos.col;
6055 		    switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos))
6056 		    {
6057 			case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2;
6058 				  col = our_paren_pos.col;
6059 				  break;
6060 			case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2;
6061 				  col = MAXCOL;
6062 				  break;
6063 		    }
6064 		}
6065 
6066 		/* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside
6067 		 * braces */
6068 		if (col == MAXCOL)
6069 		    amount += ind_unclosed;
6070 		else
6071 		{
6072 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
6073 		    curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6074 		    if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6075 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6076 			amount += ind_unclosed2;
6077 		    else
6078 			amount += ind_unclosed;
6079 		}
6080 		/*
6081 		 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two
6082 		 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous
6083 		 * lines:
6084 		 *  func_long_name(		    if (x
6085 		 *	arg				    && yy
6086 		 *	)	  ^ not here	       )    ^ not here
6087 		 */
6088 		if (cur_amount < amount)
6089 		    amount = cur_amount;
6090 	    }
6091 	}
6092 
6093 	/* add extra indent for a comment */
6094 	if (cin_iscomment(theline))
6095 	    amount += ind_comment;
6096       }
6097 
6098       /*
6099        * Are we at least inside braces, then?
6100        */
6101       else
6102       {
6103 	trypos = tryposBrace;
6104 
6105 	ourscope = trypos->lnum;
6106 	start = ml_get(ourscope);
6107 
6108 	/*
6109 	 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general.
6110 	 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that;
6111 	 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as
6112 	 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that.
6113 	 */
6114 	look = skipwhite(start);
6115 	if (*look == '{')
6116 	{
6117 	    getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6118 	    amount = col;
6119 	    if (*start == '{')
6120 		start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0;
6121 	    else
6122 		start_brace = BRACE_AT_START;
6123 	}
6124 	else
6125 	{
6126 	    /*
6127 	     * that opening brace might have been on a continuation
6128 	     * line.  if so, find the start of the line.
6129 	     */
6130 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope;
6131 
6132 	    /*
6133 	     * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6134 	     * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6135 	     */
6136 	    lnum = ourscope;
6137 	    if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')')
6138 		    && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6139 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6140 		lnum = trypos->lnum;
6141 
6142 	    /*
6143 	     * It could have been something like
6144 	     *	   case 1: if (asdf &&
6145 	     *			ldfd) {
6146 	     *		    }
6147 	     */
6148 	    if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
6149 		amount = get_indent();
6150 	    else
6151 		amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment);
6152 
6153 	    start_brace = BRACE_AT_END;
6154 	}
6155 
6156 	/*
6157 	 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where
6158 	 * we want to be.  otherwise, add the amount of room
6159 	 * that an indent is supposed to be.
6160 	 */
6161 	if (theline[0] == '}')
6162 	{
6163 	    /*
6164 	     * they may want closing braces to line up with something
6165 	     * other than the open brace.  indulge them, if so.
6166 	     */
6167 	    amount += ind_close_extra;
6168 	}
6169 	else
6170 	{
6171 	    /*
6172 	     * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if"
6173 	     * to match it with.
6174 	     * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do"
6175 	     * to match it with.
6176 	     */
6177 	    lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6178 	    if (cin_iselse(theline))
6179 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF;
6180 	    else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6181 								    /* XXX */
6182 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO;
6183 	    if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL)
6184 	    {
6185 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum;
6186 		if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen,
6187 							ind_maxcomment) == OK)
6188 		{
6189 		    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
6190 		    goto theend;
6191 		}
6192 	    }
6193 
6194 	    /*
6195 	     * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or
6196 	     * failed to find a matching "if").
6197 	     * Search backwards for something to line up with.
6198 	     * First set amount for when we don't find anything.
6199 	     */
6200 
6201 	    /*
6202 	     * if the '{' is  _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary
6203 	     * location of a left-margin brace.  Otherwise, correct the
6204 	     * location for ind_open_extra.
6205 	     */
6206 
6207 	    if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0)	    /* '{' is in column 0 */
6208 	    {
6209 		amount = ind_open_left_imag;
6210 	    }
6211 	    else
6212 	    {
6213 		if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END)    /* '{' is at end of line */
6214 		    amount += ind_open_imag;
6215 		else
6216 		{
6217 		    /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */
6218 		    amount -= ind_open_extra;
6219 		    if (amount < 0)
6220 			amount = 0;
6221 		}
6222 	    }
6223 
6224 	    lookfor_break = FALSE;
6225 
6226 	    if (cin_iscase(theline))	/* it's a switch() label */
6227 	    {
6228 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE;	/* find a previous switch() label */
6229 		amount += ind_case;
6230 	    }
6231 	    else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline))	/* private:, ... */
6232 	    {
6233 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL;	/* class decl is this block */
6234 		amount += ind_scopedecl;
6235 	    }
6236 	    else
6237 	    {
6238 		if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline))	/* break; ... */
6239 		    lookfor_break = TRUE;
6240 
6241 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6242 		amount += ind_level;	/* ind_level from start of block */
6243 	    }
6244 	    scope_amount = amount;
6245 	    whilelevel = 0;
6246 
6247 	    /*
6248 	     * Search backwards.  If we find something we recognize, line up
6249 	     * with that.
6250 	     *
6251 	     * if we're looking at an open brace, indent
6252 	     * the usual amount relative to the conditional
6253 	     * that opens the block.
6254 	     */
6255 	    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
6256 	    for (;;)
6257 	    {
6258 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
6259 		curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6260 
6261 		/*
6262 		 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line
6263 		 * up with it.
6264 		 */
6265 		if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope)
6266 		{
6267 		    /* we reached end of scope:
6268 		     * if looking for a enum or structure initialization
6269 		     * go further back:
6270 		     * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then
6271 		     * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable
6272 		     * declaration:
6273 		     * int x,
6274 		     *     here; <-- add ind_continuation
6275 		     */
6276 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6277 		    {
6278 			if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0
6279 				|| curwin->w_cursor.lnum
6280 						    < ourscope - ind_maxparen)
6281 			{
6282 			    /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit)
6283 			     * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable
6284 			     * initialization) */
6285 			    if (cont_amount > 0)
6286 				amount = cont_amount;
6287 			    else
6288 				amount += ind_continuation;
6289 			    break;
6290 			}
6291 
6292 			l = ml_get_curline();
6293 
6294 			/*
6295 			 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the
6296 			 * comment.
6297 			 */
6298 			trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment);
6299 			if (trypos != NULL)
6300 			{
6301 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6302 			    continue;
6303 			}
6304 
6305 			/*
6306 			 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
6307 			 */
6308 			if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6309 			    continue;
6310 
6311 			if (cin_nocode(l))
6312 			    continue;
6313 
6314 			terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6315 
6316 			/*
6317 			 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a
6318 			 * function declaration, we are done
6319 			 * (it's a variable declaration).
6320 			 */
6321 			if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0
6322 				|| !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6323 			{
6324 			    /* if the line is terminated with another ','
6325 			     * it is a continued variable initialization.
6326 			     * don't add extra indent.
6327 			     * TODO: does not work, if  a function
6328 			     * declaration is split over multiple lines:
6329 			     * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then.
6330 			     */
6331 			    if (terminated == ',')
6332 				break;
6333 
6334 			    /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment,
6335 			     * we are done.
6336 			     */
6337 			    if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit())
6338 				break;
6339 
6340 			    /* nothing useful found */
6341 			    if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{')
6342 				continue;
6343 			}
6344 
6345 			if (terminated != ';')
6346 			{
6347 			    /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor
6348 			     * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it
6349 			     * will take us back to the start of the line.
6350 			     */					/* XXX */
6351 			    trypos = NULL;
6352 			    if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'))
6353 				trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6354 					ind_maxcomment);
6355 
6356 			    if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6357 				trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6358 
6359 			    if (trypos != NULL)
6360 			    {
6361 				curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6362 				continue;
6363 			    }
6364 			}
6365 
6366 			/* it's a variable declaration, add indentation
6367 			 * like in
6368 			 * int a,
6369 			 *    b;
6370 			 */
6371 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6372 			    amount = cont_amount;
6373 			else
6374 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6375 		    }
6376 		    else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6377 		    {
6378 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6379 			    amount = cont_amount;
6380 			else
6381 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6382 		    }
6383 		    else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6384 					  && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6385 		    {
6386 			amount = scope_amount;
6387 			if (theline[0] == '{')
6388 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6389 		    }
6390 		    break;
6391 		}
6392 
6393 		/*
6394 		 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
6395 		 */					    /* XXX */
6396 		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6397 		{
6398 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6399 		    continue;
6400 		}
6401 
6402 		l = ml_get_curline();
6403 
6404 		/*
6405 		 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that.
6406 		 * if this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same.
6407 		 */
6408 		iscase = cin_iscase(l);
6409 		if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6410 		{
6411 		    /* we are only looking for cpp base class
6412 		     * declaration/initialization any longer */
6413 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6414 			break;
6415 
6416 		    /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in
6417 		     * labels. */
6418 		    if (whilelevel > 0)
6419 			continue;
6420 
6421 		    /*
6422 		     *	case xx:
6423 		     *	    c = 99 +	    <- this indent plus continuation
6424 		     *->	   here;
6425 		     */
6426 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6427 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6428 		    {
6429 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6430 			    amount = cont_amount;
6431 			else
6432 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6433 			break;
6434 		    }
6435 
6436 		    /*
6437 		     *	case xx:	<- line up with this case
6438 		     *	    x = 333;
6439 		     *	case yy:
6440 		     */
6441 		    if (       (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE)
6442 			    || (iscase && lookfor_break)
6443 			    || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL))
6444 		    {
6445 			/*
6446 			 * Check that this case label is not for another
6447 			 * switch()
6448 			 */				    /* XXX */
6449 			if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) ==
6450 					     NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope)
6451 			{
6452 			    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
6453 			    break;
6454 			}
6455 			continue;
6456 		    }
6457 
6458 		    n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum);  /* XXX */
6459 
6460 		    /*
6461 		     *	 case xx: if (cond)	    <- line up with this if
6462 		     *		      y = y + 1;
6463 		     * ->	  s = 99;
6464 		     *
6465 		     *	 case xx:
6466 		     *	     if (cond)		<- line up with this line
6467 		     *		 y = y + 1;
6468 		     * ->    s = 99;
6469 		     */
6470 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
6471 		    {
6472 			if (n)
6473 			    amount = n;
6474 
6475 			if (!lookfor_break)
6476 			    break;
6477 		    }
6478 
6479 		    /*
6480 		     *	 case xx: x = x + 1;	    <- line up with this x
6481 		     * ->	  y = y + 1;
6482 		     *
6483 		     *	 case xx: if (cond)	    <- line up with this if
6484 		     * ->	       y = y + 1;
6485 		     */
6486 		    if (n)
6487 		    {
6488 			amount = n;
6489 			l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6490 			if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l))
6491 			    amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6492 			break;
6493 		    }
6494 
6495 		    /*
6496 		     * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch
6497 		     * label.  If nothing is found, line up relative to the
6498 		     * switch label.
6499 		     *	    break;		<- may line up with this line
6500 		     *	 case xx:
6501 		     * ->   y = 1;
6502 		     */
6503 		    scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase    /* XXX */
6504 					? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code);
6505 		    lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY;
6506 		    continue;
6507 		}
6508 
6509 		/*
6510 		 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration,
6511 		 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks.
6512 		 */
6513 		if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)
6514 		{
6515 		    if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos =
6516 				    find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6517 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6518 		    continue;
6519 		}
6520 
6521 		/*
6522 		 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them.
6523 		 */
6524 		if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
6525 		{
6526 		    l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6527 		    if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l))
6528 			continue;
6529 		}
6530 
6531 		/*
6532 		 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc.
6533 		 * Ignore comment and empty lines.
6534 		 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have
6535 		 * unlocked it)
6536 		 */
6537 		l = ml_get_curline();
6538 		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
6539 							     || cin_nocode(l))
6540 		    continue;
6541 
6542 		/*
6543 		 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
6544 		 * constructor initialization?
6545 		 */						    /* XXX */
6546 		if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass
6547 					     && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
6548 		{
6549 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6550 		    {
6551 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6552 			    amount = cont_amount;
6553 			else
6554 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6555 		    }
6556 		    else if (col == 0 || theline[0] == '{')
6557 		    {
6558 			amount = get_indent();
6559 			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
6560 				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6561 					ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6562 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */
6563 			if (theline[0] != '{')
6564 			    amount += ind_cpp_baseclass;
6565 		    }
6566 		    else
6567 		    {
6568 			curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6569 			getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
6570 			amount = (int)col;
6571 		    }
6572 		    break;
6573 		}
6574 		else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6575 		{
6576 		    /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class
6577 		     * declaration or initialization before the opening brace. */
6578 		    if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE))
6579 			break;
6580 		    else
6581 			continue;
6582 		}
6583 
6584 		/*
6585 		 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated.
6586 		 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if
6587 		 * there is anoter unterminated statement behind, eg:
6588 		 *   123,
6589 		 *   sizeof
6590 		 *	  here
6591 		 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure
6592 		 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration
6593 		 * (indented).
6594 		 */
6595 		terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6596 
6597 		if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6598 							&& terminated == ','))
6599 		{
6600 		    /*
6601 		     * if we're in the middle of a paren thing,
6602 		     * go back to the line that starts it so
6603 		     * we can get the right prevailing indent
6604 		     *	   if ( foo &&
6605 		     *		    bar )
6606 		     */
6607 		    /*
6608 		     * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6609 		     * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6610 		     */
6611 		    (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
6612 		    trypos = find_match_paren(
6613 				 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6614 							      ind_maxcomment);
6615 
6616 		    /*
6617 		     * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching
6618 		     * braces.
6619 		     */
6620 		    if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6621 			trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6622 
6623 		    if (trypos != NULL)
6624 		    {
6625 			/*
6626 			 * Check if we are on a case label now.  This is
6627 			 * handled above.
6628 			 *     case xx:  if ( asdf &&
6629 			 *			asdf)
6630 			 */
6631 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
6632 			l = ml_get_curline();
6633 			if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6634 			{
6635 			    ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6636 			    continue;
6637 			}
6638 		    }
6639 
6640 		    /*
6641 		     * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the
6642 		     * indent from
6643 		     * char *usethis = "bla\
6644 		     *		 bla",
6645 		     *      here;
6646 		     */
6647 		    if (terminated == ',')
6648 		    {
6649 			while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6650 			{
6651 			    l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6652 			    if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
6653 				break;
6654 			    --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6655 			}
6656 		    }
6657 
6658 		    /*
6659 		     * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
6660 		     * ignoring any jump label.	    XXX
6661 		     */
6662 		    cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
6663 							  &l, ind_maxcomment);
6664 
6665 		    /*
6666 		     * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it
6667 		     * starts with a '{', line it up with this line.
6668 		     *		while (not)
6669 		     * ->	{
6670 		     *		}
6671 		     */
6672 		    if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6673 							 && theline[0] == '{')
6674 		    {
6675 			amount = cur_amount;
6676 			/*
6677 			 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line
6678 			 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match
6679 			 * in the same line (scope is the same).  Probably:
6680 			 *	{ 1, 2 },
6681 			 * ->	{ 3, 4 }
6682 			 */
6683 			if (*skipwhite(l) != '{')
6684 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6685 
6686 			if (ind_cpp_baseclass)
6687 			{
6688 			    /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base
6689 			     * class declaration or initialization */
6690 			    lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6691 			    continue;
6692 			}
6693 			break;
6694 		    }
6695 
6696 		    /*
6697 		     * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc.
6698 		     * Also allow "   } else".
6699 		     */
6700 		    if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l)))
6701 		    {
6702 			/*
6703 			 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up
6704 			 * with the last one.
6705 			 *   if (cond)
6706 			 *	    100 +
6707 			 * ->		here;
6708 			 */
6709 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6710 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6711 			{
6712 			    if (cont_amount > 0)
6713 				amount = cont_amount;
6714 			    else
6715 				amount += ind_continuation;
6716 			    break;
6717 			}
6718 
6719 			/*
6720 			 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we
6721 			 * are finished.
6722 			 *	    while (not)
6723 			 * ->		here;
6724 			 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line
6725 			 * before this is terminated.
6726 			 *	yyy;
6727 			 *	if (stat)
6728 			 *	    while (not)
6729 			 *		xxx;
6730 			 * ->	here;
6731 			 */
6732 			amount = cur_amount;
6733 			if (theline[0] == '{')
6734 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6735 			if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
6736 			{
6737 			    amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6738 			    break;
6739 			}
6740 
6741 			/*
6742 			 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a
6743 			 * do, line up with the while()
6744 			 *     do
6745 			 *	    x = 1;
6746 			 * ->  here
6747 			 */
6748 			l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline());
6749 			if (cin_isdo(l))
6750 			{
6751 			    if (whilelevel == 0)
6752 				break;
6753 			    --whilelevel;
6754 			}
6755 
6756 			/*
6757 			 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the
6758 			 * one between the "if" and the "else".
6759 			 * Need to use the scope of this "else".  XXX
6760 			 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
6761 			 */
6762 			if (cin_iselse(l)
6763 				&& whilelevel == 0
6764 				&& ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
6765 								    == NULL
6766 				    || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
6767 					ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL))
6768 			    break;
6769 		    }
6770 
6771 		    /*
6772 		     * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an
6773 		     * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or
6774 		     * add someting for a continuation line, depending on
6775 		     * the line before this one.
6776 		     */
6777 		    else
6778 		    {
6779 			/*
6780 			 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with
6781 			 * the last one.
6782 			 *   c = 99 +
6783 			 *	    100 +
6784 			 * ->	    here;
6785 			 */
6786 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6787 			{
6788 			    /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */
6789 			    if (terminated == ',')
6790 				amount += ind_continuation;
6791 			    break;
6792 			}
6793 
6794 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6795 			{
6796 			    /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the
6797 			     * lowest one, but check for cpp base class
6798 			     * declaration/initialization, if it is an
6799 			     * opening brace or we are looking just for
6800 			     * enumerations/initializations. */
6801 			    if (terminated == ',')
6802 			    {
6803 				if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0)
6804 				    break;
6805 
6806 				lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6807 				continue;
6808 			    }
6809 
6810 			    /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but
6811 			     * reduce indent. */
6812 			    if (amount > cur_amount)
6813 				amount = cur_amount;
6814 			}
6815 			else
6816 			{
6817 			    /*
6818 			     * Found first unterminated line on a row, may
6819 			     * line up with this line, remember its indent
6820 			     *	    100 +
6821 			     * ->	    here;
6822 			     */
6823 			    amount = cur_amount;
6824 
6825 			    /*
6826 			     * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we
6827 			     * are in an initialization or enum
6828 			     * struct xxx =
6829 			     * {
6830 			     *      sizeof a,
6831 			     *      124 };
6832 			     * or a normal possible continuation line.
6833 			     * but only, of no other statement has been found
6834 			     * yet.
6835 			     */
6836 			    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',')
6837 			    {
6838 				lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT;
6839 				cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount();
6840 			    }
6841 			    else
6842 			    {
6843 				if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL
6844 					&& *l != NUL
6845 					&& l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
6846 								/* XXX */
6847 				    cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(
6848 						       curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
6849 				if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
6850 				    lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
6851 			    }
6852 			}
6853 		    }
6854 		}
6855 
6856 		/*
6857 		 * Check if we are after a while (cond);
6858 		 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do".
6859 		 */
6860 							/* XXX */
6861 		else if (cin_iswhileofdo(l,
6862 					 curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6863 		{
6864 		    /*
6865 		     * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up
6866 		     * with the last one.
6867 		     *	    while (cond);
6868 		     *	    100 +		<- line up with this one
6869 		     * ->	    here;
6870 		     */
6871 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6872 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6873 		    {
6874 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6875 			    amount = cont_amount;
6876 			else
6877 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6878 			break;
6879 		    }
6880 
6881 		    if (whilelevel == 0)
6882 		    {
6883 			lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM;
6884 			amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
6885 			if (theline[0] == '{')
6886 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6887 		    }
6888 		    ++whilelevel;
6889 		}
6890 
6891 		/*
6892 		 * We are after a "normal" statement.
6893 		 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the
6894 		 * indent of that other statement.
6895 		 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used,
6896 		 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement.
6897 		 */
6898 		else
6899 		{
6900 		    /*
6901 		     * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It
6902 		     * may be lined up with the case label.
6903 		     */
6904 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK
6905 				  && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
6906 		    {
6907 			lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY;
6908 			continue;
6909 		    }
6910 
6911 		    /*
6912 		     * Handle "do {" line.
6913 		     */
6914 		    if (whilelevel > 0)
6915 		    {
6916 			l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
6917 			if (cin_isdo(l))
6918 			{
6919 			    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
6920 			    --whilelevel;
6921 			    continue;
6922 			}
6923 		    }
6924 
6925 		    /*
6926 		     * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add
6927 		     * the amount for a continuation line.
6928 		     *	 x = 1;
6929 		     *	 y = foo +
6930 		     * ->	here;
6931 		     * or
6932 		     *	 int x = 1;
6933 		     *	 int foo,
6934 		     * ->	here;
6935 		     */
6936 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6937 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6938 		    {
6939 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6940 			    amount = cont_amount;
6941 			else
6942 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6943 			break;
6944 		    }
6945 
6946 		    /*
6947 		     * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if"
6948 		     * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us.
6949 		     *	 x = 1;				x = 1;
6950 		     *	 if (asdf)		    y = 2;
6951 		     *	     while (asdf)	  ->here;
6952 		     *		here;
6953 		     * ->foo;
6954 		     */
6955 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
6956 		    {
6957 			if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0)
6958 			    break;
6959 		    }
6960 
6961 		    /*
6962 		     * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated.
6963 		     * To know what needs to be done look further backward for
6964 		     * a terminated line.
6965 		     */
6966 		    else
6967 		    {
6968 			/*
6969 			 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so
6970 			 * that matching it will take us back to the start of
6971 			 * the line.  Helps for:
6972 			 *     func(asdr,
6973 			 *	      asdfasdf);
6974 			 *     here;
6975 			 */
6976 term_again:
6977 			l = ml_get_curline();
6978 			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
6979 				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6980 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6981 			{
6982 			    /*
6983 			     * Check if we are on a case label now.  This is
6984 			     * handled above.
6985 			     *	   case xx:  if ( asdf &&
6986 			     *			    asdf)
6987 			     */
6988 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
6989 			    l = ml_get_curline();
6990 			    if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6991 			    {
6992 				++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6993 				continue;
6994 			    }
6995 			}
6996 
6997 			/* When aligning with the case statement, don't align
6998 			 * with a statement after it.
6999 			 *  case 1: {   <-- don't use this { position
7000 			 *	stat;
7001 			 *  }
7002 			 *  case 2:
7003 			 *	stat;
7004 			 * }
7005 			 */
7006 			iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l));
7007 
7008 			/*
7009 			 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
7010 			 * ignoring any jump label.
7011 			 */
7012 			amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
7013 							  &l, ind_maxcomment);
7014 
7015 			if (theline[0] == '{')
7016 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7017 			/* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */
7018 			if (*skipwhite(l) == '{')
7019 			    amount -= ind_open_extra;
7020 			lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM;
7021 
7022 			/*
7023 			 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of
7024 			 * that block.
7025 			 */
7026 			curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7027 			if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}'
7028 				&& (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7029 							    != NULL) /* XXX */
7030 			{
7031 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7032 			    /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */
7033 			    /* but skip block for "} else {" */
7034 			    l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7035 			    if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l))
7036 				goto term_again;
7037 			    ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7038 			}
7039 		    }
7040 		}
7041 	    }
7042 	}
7043       }
7044 
7045       /* add extra indent for a comment */
7046       if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7047 	  amount += ind_comment;
7048     }
7049 
7050     /*
7051      * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all!
7052      *
7053      * this means we're at the top level, and everything should
7054      * basically just match where the previous line is, except
7055      * for the lines immediately following a function declaration,
7056      * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented.
7057      */
7058     else
7059     {
7060 	/*
7061 	 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any
7062 	 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start
7063 	 * of a function
7064 	 */
7065 
7066 	if (theline[0] == '{')
7067 	{
7068 	    amount = ind_first_open;
7069 	}
7070 
7071 	/*
7072 	 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current
7073 	 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec.
7074 	 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment
7075 	 * or if the current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';'.
7076 	 */
7077 	else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count
7078 		&& !cin_nocode(theline)
7079 		&& !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL)
7080 		&& !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7081 		&& cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1)
7082 		&& !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE))
7083 	{
7084 	    amount = ind_func_type;
7085 	}
7086 	else
7087 	{
7088 	    amount = 0;
7089 	    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7090 
7091 	    /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */
7092 
7093 	    while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7094 	    {
7095 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7096 		curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7097 
7098 		l = ml_get_curline();
7099 
7100 		/*
7101 		 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
7102 		 */						/* XXX */
7103 		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7104 		{
7105 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7106 		    continue;
7107 		}
7108 
7109 		/*
7110 		 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or constructor
7111 		 * initialization?
7112 		 */						    /* XXX */
7113 		if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{'
7114 					     && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
7115 		{
7116 		    if (col == 0)
7117 		    {
7118 			amount = get_indent() + ind_cpp_baseclass;  /* XXX */
7119 			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7120 				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7121 					ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7122 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum)
7123 					   + ind_cpp_baseclass;	    /* XXX */
7124 		    }
7125 		    else
7126 		    {
7127 			curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
7128 			getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
7129 			amount = (int)col;
7130 		    }
7131 		    break;
7132 		}
7133 
7134 		/*
7135 		 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
7136 		 */
7137 		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7138 		    continue;
7139 
7140 		if (cin_nocode(l))
7141 		    continue;
7142 
7143 		/*
7144 		 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of
7145 		 * indentation:
7146 		 * int foo,
7147 		 *     bar;
7148 		 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg.
7149 		 * enum foobar
7150 		 * {
7151 		 *   ...
7152 		 * } foo,
7153 		 *   bar;
7154 		 */
7155 		n = 0;
7156 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7157 			     || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\'))
7158 		{
7159 		    /* take us back to opening paren */
7160 		    if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7161 			    && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7162 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7163 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7164 
7165 		    /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go
7166 		     * back to the first line with a backslash:
7167 		     * char *foo = "bla\
7168 		     *		 bla",
7169 		     *      here;
7170 		     */
7171 		    while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7172 		    {
7173 			l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7174 			if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7175 			    break;
7176 			--curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7177 		    }
7178 
7179 		    amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7180 
7181 		    if (amount == 0)
7182 			amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7183 		    if (amount == 0)
7184 			amount = ind_continuation;
7185 		    break;
7186 		}
7187 
7188 		/*
7189 		 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're
7190 		 * not in a comment, put it the left margin.
7191 		 */
7192 		if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum))  /* XXX */
7193 		    break;
7194 		l = ml_get_curline();
7195 
7196 		/*
7197 		 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function.  Put
7198 		 * current line at the left margin.  For when 'cino' has "fs".
7199 		 */
7200 		if (*skipwhite(l) == '}')
7201 		    break;
7202 
7203 		/*			    (matching {)
7204 		 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by
7205 		 * comments) align at column 0.  For example:
7206 		 * char *string_array[] = { "foo",
7207 		 *     / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * /
7208 		 */
7209 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL))
7210 		    break;
7211 
7212 		/*
7213 		 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current
7214 		 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as
7215 		 * parameters.
7216 		 */
7217 		if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7218 		{
7219 		    amount = ind_param;
7220 		    break;
7221 		}
7222 
7223 		/*
7224 		 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the
7225 		 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero:
7226 		 * int foo,
7227 		 *     bar;
7228 		 * indent_to_0 here;
7229 		 */
7230 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u*)";", NULL))
7231 		{
7232 		    l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7233 		    if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7234 			    || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\'))
7235 			break;
7236 		    l = ml_get_curline();
7237 		}
7238 
7239 		/*
7240 		 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just
7241 		 * use the indent of this line.
7242 		 *
7243 		 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7244 		 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7245 		 */
7246 		find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7247 
7248 		if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7249 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7250 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7251 		amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7252 		break;
7253 	    }
7254 
7255 	    /* add extra indent for a comment */
7256 	    if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7257 		amount += ind_comment;
7258 
7259 	    /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash:
7260 	     *	      "asdfasdf\
7261 	     *		  here";
7262 	     *	    char *foo = "asdf\
7263 	     *			 here";
7264 	     */
7265 	    if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1)
7266 	    {
7267 		l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7268 		if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7269 		{
7270 		    cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7271 		    if (cur_amount > 0)
7272 			amount = cur_amount;
7273 		    else if (cur_amount == 0)
7274 			amount += ind_continuation;
7275 		}
7276 	    }
7277 	}
7278     }
7279 
7280 theend:
7281     /* put the cursor back where it belongs */
7282     curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7283 
7284     vim_free(linecopy);
7285 
7286     if (amount < 0)
7287 	return 0;
7288     return amount;
7289 }
7290 
7291     static int
7292 find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
7293     int		lookfor;
7294     linenr_T	ourscope;
7295     int		ind_maxparen;
7296     int		ind_maxcomment;
7297 {
7298     char_u	*look;
7299     pos_T	*theirscope;
7300     char_u	*mightbeif;
7301     int		elselevel;
7302     int		whilelevel;
7303 
7304     if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7305     {
7306 	elselevel = 1;
7307 	whilelevel = 0;
7308     }
7309     else
7310     {
7311 	elselevel = 0;
7312 	whilelevel = 1;
7313     }
7314 
7315     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7316 
7317     while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1)
7318     {
7319 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7320 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7321 
7322 	look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7323 	if (cin_iselse(look)
7324 		|| cin_isif(look)
7325 		|| cin_isdo(look)			    /* XXX */
7326 		|| cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7327 	{
7328 	    /*
7329 	     * if we've gone outside the braces entirely,
7330 	     * we must be out of scope...
7331 	     */
7332 	    theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);  /* XXX */
7333 	    if (theirscope == NULL)
7334 		break;
7335 
7336 	    /*
7337 	     * and if the brace enclosing this is further
7338 	     * back than the one enclosing the else, we're
7339 	     * out of luck too.
7340 	     */
7341 	    if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope)
7342 		break;
7343 
7344 	    /*
7345 	     * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace,
7346 	     * then we can ignore it because it's in a
7347 	     * different scope...
7348 	     */
7349 	    if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope)
7350 		continue;
7351 
7352 	    /*
7353 	     * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if")
7354 	     * then we need to go back to another if, so
7355 	     * increment elselevel
7356 	     */
7357 	    look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7358 	    if (cin_iselse(look))
7359 	    {
7360 		mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4);
7361 		if (!cin_isif(mightbeif))
7362 		    ++elselevel;
7363 		continue;
7364 	    }
7365 
7366 	    /*
7367 	     * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to
7368 	     * another "do", so increment whilelevel.  XXX
7369 	     */
7370 	    if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7371 	    {
7372 		++whilelevel;
7373 		continue;
7374 	    }
7375 
7376 	    /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */
7377 	    look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7378 	    if (cin_isif(look))
7379 	    {
7380 		elselevel--;
7381 		/*
7382 		 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that
7383 		 * get in the way.
7384 		 */
7385 		if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7386 		    whilelevel = 0;
7387 	    }
7388 
7389 	    /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */
7390 	    if (cin_isdo(look))
7391 		whilelevel--;
7392 
7393 	    /*
7394 	     * if we've used up all the elses, then
7395 	     * this must be the if that we want!
7396 	     * match the indent level of that if.
7397 	     */
7398 	    if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0)
7399 	    {
7400 		return OK;
7401 	    }
7402 	}
7403     }
7404     return FAIL;
7405 }
7406 
7407 # if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
7408 /*
7409  * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'.
7410  */
7411     int
7412 get_expr_indent()
7413 {
7414     int		indent;
7415     pos_T	pos;
7416     int		save_State;
7417 
7418     pos = curwin->w_cursor;
7419     set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7420     ++sandbox;
7421     indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde);
7422     --sandbox;
7423 
7424     /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to.
7425      * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o"
7426      * command. */
7427     save_State = State;
7428     State = INSERT;
7429     curwin->w_cursor = pos;
7430     check_cursor();
7431     State = save_State;
7432 
7433     /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */
7434     if (indent < 0)
7435 	indent = get_indent();
7436 
7437     return indent;
7438 }
7439 # endif
7440 
7441 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */
7442 
7443 #if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO)
7444 
7445 static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p));
7446 
7447     static int
7448 lisp_match(p)
7449     char_u	*p;
7450 {
7451     char_u	buf[LSIZE];
7452     int		len;
7453     char_u	*word = p_lispwords;
7454 
7455     while (*word != NUL)
7456     {
7457 	(void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ",");
7458 	len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
7459 	if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ')
7460 	    return TRUE;
7461     }
7462     return FALSE;
7463 }
7464 
7465 /*
7466  * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used.
7467  * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting
7468  * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still
7469  * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, [email protected]
7470  *
7471  * TODO:
7472  * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch
7473  * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented:
7474  * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals
7475  * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon
7476  * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal
7477  * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases.
7478  * Update from Sergey Khorev:
7479  * I tried to fix the first two issues.
7480  */
7481     int
7482 get_lisp_indent()
7483 {
7484     pos_T	*pos, realpos, paren;
7485     int		amount;
7486     char_u	*that;
7487     colnr_T	col;
7488     colnr_T	firsttry;
7489     int		parencount, quotecount;
7490     int		vi_lisp;
7491 
7492     /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */
7493     vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL);
7494 
7495     realpos = curwin->w_cursor;
7496     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7497 
7498     if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL)
7499 	pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7500     else
7501     {
7502 	paren = *pos;
7503 	pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7504 	if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren))
7505 	    pos = &paren;
7506     }
7507     if (pos != NULL)
7508     {
7509 	/* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white
7510 	 * line that is at the same () level. */
7511 	amount = -1;
7512 	parencount = 0;
7513 
7514 	while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum)
7515 	{
7516 	    if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7517 		continue;
7518 	    for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that)
7519 	    {
7520 		if (*that == ';')
7521 		{
7522 		    while (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7523 			++that;
7524 		    continue;
7525 		}
7526 		if (*that == '\\')
7527 		{
7528 		    if (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7529 			++that;
7530 		    continue;
7531 		}
7532 		if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL)
7533 		{
7534 		    that++;
7535 		    while (*that && (*that != '"' || *(that - 1) == '\\'))
7536 			++that;
7537 		}
7538 		if (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7539 		    ++parencount;
7540 		else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']')
7541 		    --parencount;
7542 	    }
7543 	    if (parencount == 0)
7544 	    {
7545 		amount = get_indent();
7546 		break;
7547 	    }
7548 	}
7549 
7550 	if (amount == -1)
7551 	{
7552 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
7553 	    curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col;
7554 	    col = pos->col;
7555 
7556 	    that = ml_get_curline();
7557 
7558 	    if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0)
7559 		amount = 2;
7560 	    else
7561 	    {
7562 		amount = 0;
7563 		while (*that && col)
7564 		{
7565 		    amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount);
7566 		    col--;
7567 		}
7568 
7569 		/*
7570 		 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the
7571 		 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms):
7572 		 *
7573 		 * (let ((a 1))    instead    (let ((a 1))
7574 		 *   (...))	      of	   (...))
7575 		 */
7576 
7577 		if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7578 						      && lisp_match(that + 1))
7579 		    amount += 2;
7580 		else
7581 		{
7582 		    that++;
7583 		    amount++;
7584 		    firsttry = amount;
7585 
7586 		    while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7587 		    {
7588 			amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7589 			++that;
7590 		    }
7591 
7592 		    if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */
7593 		    {
7594 			/* test *that != '(' to accomodate first let/do
7595 			 * argument if it is more than one line */
7596 			if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[')
7597 			    firsttry++;
7598 
7599 			parencount = 0;
7600 			quotecount = 0;
7601 
7602 			if (vi_lisp
7603 				|| (*that != '"'
7604 				    && *that != '\''
7605 				    && *that != '#'
7606 				    && (*that < '0' || *that > '9')))
7607 			{
7608 			    while (*that
7609 				    && (!vim_iswhite(*that)
7610 					|| quotecount
7611 					|| parencount)
7612 				    && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7613 					    && !quotecount
7614 					    && !parencount
7615 					    && vi_lisp)))
7616 			    {
7617 				if (*that == '"')
7618 				    quotecount = !quotecount;
7619 				if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7620 							       && !quotecount)
7621 				    ++parencount;
7622 				if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']')
7623 							       && !quotecount)
7624 				    --parencount;
7625 				if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL)
7626 				    amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7627 							     (colnr_T)amount);
7628 				amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7629 							     (colnr_T)amount);
7630 			    }
7631 			}
7632 			while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7633 			{
7634 			    amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7635 			    that++;
7636 			}
7637 			if (!*that || *that == ';')
7638 			    amount = firsttry;
7639 		    }
7640 		}
7641 	    }
7642 	}
7643     }
7644     else
7645 	amount = 0;	/* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */
7646 
7647     curwin->w_cursor = realpos;
7648 
7649     return amount;
7650 }
7651 #endif /* FEAT_LISP */
7652 
7653     void
7654 prepare_to_exit()
7655 {
7656 #ifdef FEAT_GUI
7657     if (gui.in_use)
7658     {
7659 	gui.dying = TRUE;
7660 	out_trash();	/* trash any pending output */
7661     }
7662     else
7663 #endif
7664     {
7665 	windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0);
7666 
7667 	/*
7668 	 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal"
7669 	 * screen (if there are two screens).
7670 	 */
7671 	settmode(TMODE_COOK);
7672 #ifdef WIN3264
7673 	if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE)
7674 #endif
7675 	    stoptermcap();
7676 	out_flush();
7677     }
7678 }
7679 
7680 /*
7681  * Preserve files and exit.
7682  * When called IObuff must contain a message.
7683  */
7684     void
7685 preserve_exit()
7686 {
7687     buf_T	*buf;
7688 
7689     prepare_to_exit();
7690 
7691     out_str(IObuff);
7692     screen_start();		    /* don't know where cursor is now */
7693     out_flush();
7694 
7695     ml_close_notmod();		    /* close all not-modified buffers */
7696 
7697     for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next)
7698     {
7699 	if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL)
7700 	{
7701 	    OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n"));
7702 	    screen_start();	    /* don't know where cursor is now */
7703 	    out_flush();
7704 	    ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE);	/* preserve all swap files */
7705 	    break;
7706 	}
7707     }
7708 
7709     ml_close_all(FALSE);	    /* close all memfiles, without deleting */
7710 
7711     OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n"));
7712 
7713     getout(1);
7714 }
7715 
7716 /*
7717  * return TRUE if "fname" exists.
7718  */
7719     int
7720 vim_fexists(fname)
7721     char_u  *fname;
7722 {
7723     struct stat st;
7724 
7725     if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st))
7726 	return FALSE;
7727     return TRUE;
7728 }
7729 
7730 /*
7731  * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while.
7732  * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for
7733  * each line in the file.  Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much
7734  * time, because it can be a system call.
7735  */
7736 
7737 #ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP
7738 # ifdef FEAT_GUI		    /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */
7739 #  define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200
7740 # else
7741 #  define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32
7742 # endif
7743 #endif
7744 
7745 static int	breakcheck_count = 0;
7746 
7747     void
7748 line_breakcheck()
7749 {
7750     if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP)
7751     {
7752 	breakcheck_count = 0;
7753 	ui_breakcheck();
7754     }
7755 }
7756 
7757 /*
7758  * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often.
7759  */
7760     void
7761 fast_breakcheck()
7762 {
7763     if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10)
7764     {
7765 	breakcheck_count = 0;
7766 	ui_breakcheck();
7767     }
7768 }
7769 
7770 /*
7771  * Expand wildcards.  Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching
7772  * 'wildignore'.
7773  */
7774     int
7775 expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
7776     int		   num_pat;	/* number of input patterns */
7777     char_u	 **pat;		/* array of input patterns */
7778     int		  *num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
7779     char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
7780     int		   flags;	/* EW_DIR, etc. */
7781 {
7782     int		retval;
7783     int		i, j;
7784     char_u	*p;
7785     int		non_suf_match;	/* number without matching suffix */
7786 
7787     retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
7788 
7789     /* When keeping all matches, return here */
7790     if (flags & EW_KEEPALL)
7791 	return retval;
7792 
7793 #ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN
7794     /*
7795      * Remove names that match 'wildignore'.
7796      */
7797     if (*p_wig)
7798     {
7799 	char_u	*ffname;
7800 
7801 	/* check all files in (*file)[] */
7802 	for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
7803 	{
7804 	    ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE);
7805 	    if (ffname == NULL)		/* out of memory */
7806 		break;
7807 # ifdef VMS
7808 	    vms_remove_version(ffname);
7809 # endif
7810 	    if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname))
7811 	    {
7812 		/* remove this matching file from the list */
7813 		vim_free((*file)[i]);
7814 		for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j)
7815 		    (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1];
7816 		--*num_file;
7817 		--i;
7818 	    }
7819 	    vim_free(ffname);
7820 	}
7821     }
7822 #endif
7823 
7824     /*
7825      * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end.
7826      */
7827     if (*num_file > 1)
7828     {
7829 	non_suf_match = 0;
7830 	for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
7831 	{
7832 	    if (!match_suffix((*file)[i]))
7833 	    {
7834 		/*
7835 		 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front
7836 		 * of the list.
7837 		 */
7838 		p = (*file)[i];
7839 		for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j)
7840 		    (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1];
7841 		(*file)[non_suf_match++] = p;
7842 	    }
7843 	}
7844     }
7845 
7846     return retval;
7847 }
7848 
7849 /*
7850  * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'.
7851  */
7852     int
7853 match_suffix(fname)
7854     char_u	*fname;
7855 {
7856     int		fnamelen, setsuflen;
7857     char_u	*setsuf;
7858 #define MAXSUFLEN 30	    /* maximum length of a file suffix */
7859     char_u	suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN];
7860 
7861     fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname);
7862     setsuflen = 0;
7863     for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; )
7864     {
7865 	setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,");
7866 	if (fnamelen >= setsuflen
7867 		&& fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen,
7868 					      (size_t)setsuflen) == 0)
7869 	    break;
7870 	setsuflen = 0;
7871     }
7872     return (setsuflen != 0);
7873 }
7874 
7875 #if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO)
7876 
7877 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
7878 static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p));
7879 static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags));
7880 # endif
7881 
7882 # if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264)
7883 /*
7884  * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32.  It's here because
7885  * it's shared between these systems.
7886  */
7887 # if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO)
7888 #  define _cdecl	    /* DJGPP doesn't have this */
7889 # else
7890 #  ifdef __BORLANDC__
7891 #   define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF
7892 #  endif
7893 # endif
7894 
7895 /*
7896  * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath()
7897  */
7898     static int _cdecl
7899 pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b)
7900 {
7901     return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b));
7902 }
7903 
7904 # ifndef WIN3264
7905     static void
7906 namelowcpy(
7907     char_u *d,
7908     char_u *s)
7909 {
7910 #  ifdef DJGPP
7911     if (USE_LONG_FNAME)	    /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */
7912 	while (*s)
7913 	    *d++ = *s++;
7914     else
7915 #  endif
7916 	while (*s)
7917 	    *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++);
7918     *d = NUL;
7919 }
7920 # endif
7921 
7922 /*
7923  * Recursively build up a list of files in "gap" matching the first wildcard
7924  * in `path'.  Called by expand_wildcards().
7925  * Return the number of matches found.
7926  * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
7927  * at "path[wildoff]".
7928  */
7929     static int
7930 dos_expandpath(
7931     garray_T	*gap,
7932     char_u	*path,
7933     int		wildoff,
7934     int		flags)		/* EW_* flags */
7935 {
7936     char_u		*buf;
7937     char_u		*path_end;
7938     char_u		*p, *s, *e;
7939     int			start_len = gap->ga_len;
7940     int			ok;
7941 #ifdef WIN3264
7942     WIN32_FIND_DATA	fb;
7943     HANDLE		hFind = (HANDLE)0;
7944 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
7945     WIN32_FIND_DATAW    wfb;
7946     WCHAR		*wn = NULL;	/* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */
7947 # endif
7948 #else
7949     struct ffblk	fb;
7950 #endif
7951     int			matches;
7952     int			starts_with_dot;
7953     int			len;
7954     char_u		*pat;
7955     regmatch_T		regmatch;
7956     char_u		*matchname;
7957 
7958     /* make room for file name */
7959     buf = alloc((unsigned int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
7960     if (buf == NULL)
7961 	return 0;
7962 
7963     /*
7964      * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1.
7965      * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters.
7966      */
7967     p = buf;
7968     s = buf;
7969     e = NULL;
7970     path_end = path;
7971     while (*path_end != NUL)
7972     {
7973 	/* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
7974 	 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
7975 	if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
7976 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
7977 	else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/')
7978 	{
7979 	    if (e != NULL)
7980 		break;
7981 	    s = p + 1;
7982 	}
7983 	else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
7984 			 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL)
7985 	    e = p;
7986 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
7987 	if (has_mbyte)
7988 	{
7989 	    len = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(path_end);
7990 	    STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
7991 	    p += len;
7992 	    path_end += len;
7993 	}
7994 	else
7995 #endif
7996 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
7997     }
7998     e = p;
7999     *e = NUL;
8000 
8001     /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */
8002     /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8003      * component. */
8004     for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8005 	if (rem_backslash(p))
8006 	{
8007 	    STRCPY(p, p + 1);
8008 	    --e;
8009 	    --s;
8010 	}
8011 
8012     starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8013     pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8014     if (pat == NULL)
8015     {
8016 	vim_free(buf);
8017 	return 0;
8018     }
8019 
8020     /* compile the regexp into a program */
8021     regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE;		/* Always ignore case */
8022     regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8023     vim_free(pat);
8024 
8025     if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8026     {
8027 	vim_free(buf);
8028 	return 0;
8029     }
8030 
8031     /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */
8032     matchname = vim_strsave(s);
8033 
8034     /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */
8035     STRCPY(s, "*.*");
8036 #ifdef WIN3264
8037 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8038     if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage)
8039     {
8040 	/* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'.  Attempt using the
8041 	 * wide function.  If it fails because it is not implemented fall back
8042 	 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */
8043 	wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8044 	if (wn != NULL)
8045 	{
8046 	    hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8047 	    if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE
8048 			      && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED)
8049 	    {
8050 		vim_free(wn);
8051 		wn = NULL;
8052 	    }
8053 	}
8054     }
8055 
8056     if (wn == NULL)
8057 # endif
8058 	hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8059     ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8060 #else
8061     /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */
8062     ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8063 		(*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8064 #endif
8065 
8066     while (ok)
8067     {
8068 #ifdef WIN3264
8069 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8070 	if (wn != NULL)
8071 	    p = ucs2_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL);   /* p is allocated here */
8072 	else
8073 # endif
8074 	    p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName;
8075 #else
8076 	p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name;
8077 #endif
8078 	/* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for.  Accept
8079 	 * all entries found with "matchname". */
8080 	if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8081 		&& (matchname == NULL
8082 		    || vim_regexec(&regmatch, p, (colnr_T)0)))
8083 	{
8084 #ifdef WIN3264
8085 	    STRCPY(s, p);
8086 #else
8087 	    namelowcpy(s, p);
8088 #endif
8089 	    len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
8090 	    STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8091 	    if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end))
8092 	    {
8093 		/* need to expand another component of the path */
8094 		/* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8095 		(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags);
8096 	    }
8097 	    else
8098 	    {
8099 		/* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8100 		/* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8101 		if (*path_end != 0)
8102 		    backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8103 		if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0)	/* add existing file */
8104 		    addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8105 	    }
8106 	}
8107 
8108 #ifdef WIN3264
8109 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8110 	if (wn != NULL)
8111 	{
8112 	    vim_free(p);
8113 	    ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb);
8114 	}
8115 	else
8116 # endif
8117 	    ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb);
8118 #else
8119 	ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0);
8120 #endif
8121 
8122 	/* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name
8123 	 * itself.  Finds the long name of a short filename. */
8124 	if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len)
8125 	{
8126 	    STRCPY(s, matchname);
8127 #ifdef WIN3264
8128 	    FindClose(hFind);
8129 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8130 	    if (wn != NULL)
8131 	    {
8132 		vim_free(wn);
8133 		wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8134 		if (wn != NULL)
8135 		    hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8136 	    }
8137 	    if (wn == NULL)
8138 # endif
8139 		hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8140 	    ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8141 #else
8142 	    ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8143 		 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8144 #endif
8145 	    vim_free(matchname);
8146 	    matchname = NULL;
8147 	}
8148     }
8149 
8150 #ifdef WIN3264
8151     FindClose(hFind);
8152 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8153     vim_free(wn);
8154 # endif
8155 #endif
8156     vim_free(buf);
8157     vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8158     vim_free(matchname);
8159 
8160     matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8161     if (matches > 0)
8162 	qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches,
8163 						   sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8164     return matches;
8165 }
8166 
8167     int
8168 mch_expandpath(
8169     garray_T	*gap,
8170     char_u	*path,
8171     int		flags)		/* EW_* flags */
8172 {
8173     return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags);
8174 }
8175 # endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */
8176 
8177 /*
8178  * Generic wildcard expansion code.
8179  *
8180  * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a
8181  * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*"
8182  *
8183  * Return FAIL when no single file was found.  In this case "num_file" is not
8184  * set, and "file" may contain an error message.
8185  * Return OK when some files found.  "num_file" is set to the number of
8186  * matches, "file" to the array of matches.  Call FreeWild() later.
8187  */
8188     int
8189 gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8190     int		num_pat;	/* number of input patterns */
8191     char_u	**pat;		/* array of input patterns */
8192     int		*num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
8193     char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
8194     int		flags;		/* EW_* flags */
8195 {
8196     int			i;
8197     garray_T		ga;
8198     char_u		*p;
8199     static int		recursive = FALSE;
8200     int			add_pat;
8201 
8202     /*
8203      * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user".  If this fails,
8204      * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here.  In this case, always
8205      * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible.  Otherwise,
8206      * return FAIL.
8207      */
8208     if (recursive)
8209 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8210 	return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8211 #else
8212 	return FAIL;
8213 #endif
8214 
8215 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8216     /*
8217      * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle
8218      * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion.  This
8219      * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately.
8220      * For `=expr` do use the internal function.
8221      */
8222     for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++)
8223     {
8224 	if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL
8225 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8226 		&& !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=')
8227 # endif
8228 	   )
8229 	    return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8230     }
8231 #endif
8232 
8233     recursive = TRUE;
8234 
8235     /*
8236      * The matching file names are stored in a growarray.  Init it empty.
8237      */
8238     ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30);
8239 
8240     for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i)
8241     {
8242 	add_pat = -1;
8243 	p = pat[i];
8244 
8245 #ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8246 	if (vim_backtick(p))
8247 	    add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags);
8248 	else
8249 #endif
8250 	{
8251 	    /*
8252 	     * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/".
8253 	     */
8254 	    if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8255 	    {
8256 		p = expand_env_save(p);
8257 		if (p == NULL)
8258 		    p = pat[i];
8259 #ifdef UNIX
8260 		/*
8261 		 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment
8262 		 * variable, use the shell to do that.  Discard previously
8263 		 * found file names and start all over again.
8264 		 */
8265 		else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8266 		{
8267 		    vim_free(p);
8268 		    ga_clear(&ga);
8269 		    i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file,
8270 								       flags);
8271 		    recursive = FALSE;
8272 		    return i;
8273 		}
8274 #endif
8275 	    }
8276 
8277 	    /*
8278 	     * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to
8279 	     * the list.  If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add
8280 	     * the pattern.
8281 	     * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or
8282 	     * when EW_NOTFOUND is given.
8283 	     */
8284 	    if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p))
8285 		add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags);
8286 	}
8287 
8288 	if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)))
8289 	{
8290 	    char_u	*t = backslash_halve_save(p);
8291 
8292 #if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC)
8293 	    slash_to_colon(t);
8294 #endif
8295 	    /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs.  Makes
8296 	     * "vim c:/" work. */
8297 	    if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)
8298 		addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE);
8299 	    else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0)
8300 		addfile(&ga, t, flags);
8301 	    vim_free(t);
8302 	}
8303 
8304 	if (p != pat[i])
8305 	    vim_free(p);
8306     }
8307 
8308     *num_file = ga.ga_len;
8309     *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)"";
8310 
8311     recursive = FALSE;
8312 
8313     return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL;
8314 }
8315 
8316 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8317 
8318 /*
8319  * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here.
8320  */
8321     static int
8322 vim_backtick(p)
8323     char_u	*p;
8324 {
8325     return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`');
8326 }
8327 
8328 /*
8329  * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command.
8330  * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `.
8331  * Returns number of file names found.
8332  */
8333     static int
8334 expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags)
8335     garray_T	*gap;
8336     char_u	*pat;
8337     int		flags;	/* EW_* flags */
8338 {
8339     char_u	*p;
8340     char_u	*cmd;
8341     char_u	*buffer;
8342     int		cnt = 0;
8343     int		i;
8344 
8345     /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */
8346     cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2);
8347     if (cmd == NULL)
8348 	return 0;
8349 
8350 #ifdef FEAT_EVAL
8351     if (*cmd == '=')	    /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */
8352 	buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p);
8353     else
8354 #endif
8355 	buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL,
8356 				      (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0);
8357     vim_free(cmd);
8358     if (buffer == NULL)
8359 	return 0;
8360 
8361     cmd = buffer;
8362     while (*cmd != NUL)
8363     {
8364 	cmd = skipwhite(cmd);		/* skip over white space */
8365 	p = cmd;
8366 	while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */
8367 	    ++p;
8368 	/* add an entry if it is not empty */
8369 	if (p > cmd)
8370 	{
8371 	    i = *p;
8372 	    *p = NUL;
8373 	    addfile(gap, cmd, flags);
8374 	    *p = i;
8375 	    ++cnt;
8376 	}
8377 	cmd = p;
8378 	while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n'))
8379 	    ++cmd;
8380     }
8381 
8382     vim_free(buffer);
8383     return cnt;
8384 }
8385 # endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */
8386 
8387 /*
8388  * Add a file to a file list.  Accepted flags:
8389  * EW_DIR	add directories
8390  * EW_FILE	add files
8391  * EW_NOTFOUND	add even when it doesn't exist
8392  * EW_ADDSLASH	add slash after directory name
8393  */
8394     void
8395 addfile(gap, f, flags)
8396     garray_T	*gap;
8397     char_u	*f;	/* filename */
8398     int		flags;
8399 {
8400     char_u	*p;
8401     int		isdir;
8402 
8403     /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */
8404     if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0)
8405 	return;
8406 
8407 #ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL
8408     /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */
8409     if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL)
8410 	return;
8411 #endif
8412 
8413     isdir = mch_isdir(f);
8414     if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE)))
8415 	return;
8416 
8417     /* Make room for another item in the file list. */
8418     if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
8419 	return;
8420 
8421     p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir));
8422     if (p == NULL)
8423 	return;
8424 
8425     STRCPY(p, f);
8426 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
8427     slash_adjust(p);
8428 #endif
8429     /*
8430      * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present.
8431      */
8432 #ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR
8433     if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH))
8434 	add_pathsep(p);
8435 #endif
8436     ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
8437     --gap->ga_room;
8438 }
8439 #endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */
8440 
8441 #if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
8442 
8443 #ifndef SEEK_SET
8444 # define SEEK_SET 0
8445 #endif
8446 #ifndef SEEK_END
8447 # define SEEK_END 2
8448 #endif
8449 
8450 /*
8451  * Get the stdout of an external command.
8452  * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error.
8453  */
8454     char_u *
8455 get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags)
8456     char_u	*cmd;
8457     char_u	*infile;	/* optional input file name */
8458     int		flags;		/* can be SHELL_SILENT */
8459 {
8460     char_u	*tempname;
8461     char_u	*command;
8462     char_u	*buffer = NULL;
8463     int		len;
8464     int		i = 0;
8465     FILE	*fd;
8466 
8467     if (check_restricted() || check_secure())
8468 	return NULL;
8469 
8470     /* get a name for the temp file */
8471     if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL)
8472     {
8473 	EMSG(_(e_notmp));
8474 	return NULL;
8475     }
8476 
8477     /* Add the redirection stuff */
8478     command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname);
8479     if (command == NULL)
8480 	goto done;
8481 
8482     /*
8483      * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored).
8484      * Don't check timestamps here.
8485      */
8486     ++no_check_timestamps;
8487     call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags);
8488     --no_check_timestamps;
8489 
8490     vim_free(command);
8491 
8492     /*
8493      * read the names from the file into memory
8494      */
8495 # ifdef VMS
8496     /* created temporary file is not allways readable as binary */
8497     fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r");
8498 # else
8499     fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN);
8500 # endif
8501 
8502     if (fd == NULL)
8503     {
8504 	EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname);
8505 	goto done;
8506     }
8507 
8508     fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END);
8509     len = ftell(fd);		    /* get size of temp file */
8510     fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET);
8511 
8512     buffer = alloc(len + 1);
8513     if (buffer != NULL)
8514 	i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd);
8515     fclose(fd);
8516     mch_remove(tempname);
8517     if (buffer == NULL)
8518 	goto done;
8519 #ifdef VMS
8520     len = i;	/* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */
8521 #endif
8522     if (i != len)
8523     {
8524 	EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname);
8525 	vim_free(buffer);
8526 	buffer = NULL;
8527     }
8528     else
8529 	buffer[len] = '\0';	/* make sure the buffer is terminated */
8530 
8531 done:
8532     vim_free(tempname);
8533     return buffer;
8534 }
8535 #endif
8536 
8537 /*
8538  * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion
8539  * functions.
8540  */
8541     void
8542 FreeWild(count, files)
8543     int	    count;
8544     char_u  **files;
8545 {
8546     if (files == NULL || count <= 0)
8547 	return;
8548 #if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */
8549     /*
8550      * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have
8551      * been used???
8552      */
8553     _fnexplodefree((char **)files);
8554 #else
8555     while (count--)
8556 	vim_free(files[count]);
8557     vim_free(files);
8558 #endif
8559 }
8560 
8561 /*
8562  * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'.
8563  * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping.
8564  * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command.
8565  */
8566     int
8567 goto_im()
8568 {
8569     return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed());
8570 }
8571